JP7064280B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which a gaming state favorable to a player is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a gaming state favorable to a player is generated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, when the result mode of the variable display game executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening) is a predetermined special result. In addition, a special game state (big hit) that can give the player a game value occurs. Then, when the special gaming state occurs with the fulfillment of a specific condition, a specific gaming state is generated in which the special gaming state is more likely to occur than the normal state after the end of the special gaming state.
Then, in this gaming machine, a special gaming state, a specific gaming state after the special gaming state, and a special gaming state generated by executing a special figure variation display game having a special result during the specific gaming state. A series of special continuous productions are performed over.
As a result, in this gaming machine, a sense of unity is given to the effect to be executed from the current special gaming state to the next special gaming state.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-104619

However, with conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the interest in gaming will decline.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, it is not possible to have a relationship between the effect executed in the specific gaming state and the effect executed in the normal state, and there is a possibility that the interest of the game is lowered.
An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention acquires the first game information when the first condition is satisfied, and acquires the second game information when the second condition is satisfied. The game information acquisition means, the game information storage means capable of storing the second game information acquired by the game information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the game information acquisition means acquired. When the winning determination means for executing the winning determination based on the first game information or the second game information and the winning determination based on the first game information are executed, the winning determination is executed based on the result of the winning determination. The first notification display means for executing the first notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination and the winning determination based on the second game information are executed according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination . In that case, a second notification display means for executing a second notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination executed based on the result of the winning determination. , A special gaming state control means that causes a special gaming state when a specific result is determined by the winning determination, and an advantageous state that facilitates the establishment of the second condition when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. It is provided with an advantageous state control means for terminating the advantageous state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an effect control means for executing the notification effect corresponding to the first notification display or the second notification display. The winning determination means executes the winning determination with respect to the second game information in preference to the first game information, and the predetermined end condition is executed during the occurrence of the advantageous state. 2 It is established when the number of times of notification display reaches a predetermined number of times, the mode of the notification effect is selected according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination, and the effect control means causes the advantageous state. The notification effect corresponding to the second notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination executed during the process, and the second game stored in the game information storage means when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. As the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination based on the information, the first notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination executed during the non-occurrence of the advantageous state is supported. It is characterized in that the notification effect in which the result of the winning determination is suggested can be executed by a specific mode different from the notification effect.

In the game machine according to the first invention, a notification effect corresponding to a second notification display for notifying the result of a winning determination executed during the occurrence of an advantageous state, and a game information storage means when a predetermined end condition is satisfied. As a notification effect corresponding to the second notification display that notifies the result of the winning determination based on the second game information stored in (hereinafter referred to as "reserved second game information"), it is executed during non-occurrence of an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a notification effect in which the result of the winning determination is suggested by a specific mode different from the notification effect corresponding to the first notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination.
As a result, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the effect content related to the notification effect executed during the occurrence of the advantageous state and the notification effect (based on the reserved second game information) executed during the non-occurrence of the advantageous state. The contents of the effect related to the notification effect) are related to each other.
Therefore, in the gaming machine according to the first invention, the player recognizes the first specific advantageous state composed of different gaming states (during the occurrence of the advantageous state and during the non-occurrence of the advantageous state) as a series of gaming states. Can be made to.
Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to the first invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming.

Here, as the first game information, the special figure 1 start information described later corresponds. The second game information corresponds to the special figure 2 start information described later. The main control circuit 200 (step S9-3), which will be described later, corresponds to the game information acquisition means. As the game information storage means, the special figure 2 start information storage area described later corresponds. As the winning determination, the special drawing winning determination (step S11-4 ) described later corresponds. The main control circuit 200 (step S11-4 ), which will be described later, corresponds to the winning determination means. The first notification display corresponds to the notification display (variable display and stop display) of the first special symbol described later. As the first notification display means, the special figure 1 display device 61 (main control circuit 200), which will be described later, corresponds to this. The second notification display corresponds to the notification display (variable display and stop display) of the second special symbol described later. As the second notification display means, the special figure 2 display device 62 (main control circuit 200), which will be described later, corresponds to this. As a specific result , "small hit" described later corresponds. The special gaming state corresponds to the small hit gaming state described later. The main control circuit 200 (steps S13-9 to S13-12), which will be described later, corresponds to the special game state control means. The advantageous state corresponds to the execution of the time saving control described later. The main control circuit 200 (step S18-2), which will be described later, corresponds to the advantageous state control means. The predetermined number of times corresponds to the second time reduction number described later. The notification effect, which will be described later, corresponds to the notification effect (variable effect and stop effect). The staging control circuit 300, which will be described later, corresponds to the staging control means.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 start ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening end wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows the character opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting thing processing of the end of opening of an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the launch position designation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit effect management process. It is a figure which shows the preliminary determination result pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the V prize production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the addition effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the launch position display management process. It is a figure which shows an example of the progress of a game in a pachinko machine 1.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 includes a rectangular outer frame 2, an inner frame 3 arranged on the front side of the outer frame 2, and a door unit 4 arranged on the front side of the inner frame 3. There is.
The inner frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape and is arranged so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2. A game board unit 10 (see FIG. 2) is attached to the inside of the inner frame 3.
The door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and is arranged so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2. As a result, the door unit 4 can open and close the front side of the game board unit 10 (game board 11 described later) attached to the inner frame 3. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged at a substantially central portion, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 arranged under the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer. It is provided with a firing handle 6 disposed on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass, and is arranged on the front side of the game board unit 10 (game area 30) attached to the inner frame 3. As a result, the player can visually recognize the game board unit 10 (game area 30) via the transparent plate 4a.
The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. At each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b, a sound extraction portion 4c in which a sound generator (speaker) 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged is provided. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the sound generator 22 passes.
Further, a plurality of frame lamps 20 are arranged inside the decorative portion 4b. Each frame lamp 20 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 has a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), an effect button 5b arranged on the front side of the saucer 5a, and a rotary selector 5c.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape, and is arranged so as to project upward from the saucer unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (operation of pushing downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 25 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is arranged so as to surround the periphery of the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated (operated around a cylindrical axis) by a player. Inside the saucer unit 5, a second operation detection switch 26 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is arranged. The second operation detection switch 26 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control circuit 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to the CR unit 500 (see FIG. 3) capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 500, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 500 is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 500, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit 500, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 500.
Here, the prepaid cart corresponds to, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the firing handle 6, a firing volume (not shown) for detecting the angle at which the firing handle 6 is rotated is arranged. The firing volume outputs a detection signal according to the detected angle to the payout control circuit 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board unit.
The game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the front side of the set plate, an image display device 23 and a drum type display device 24 attached to the back side of the set plate. It is equipped with.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is formed of a resin in a flat plate shape. As shown in FIG. 2, an opening (not shown) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player visually recognizes the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 and the drums 24a to 24c of the drum type display device 24 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate. It is possible to do.
Around the opening in the front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which the game ball launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flows down. In the game area 30, the left side path 30a formed on the left side of the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 and the right side of the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 are formed as paths for the game ball to flow down. The right side path 30b and the like are formed.
A plurality of board surface lamps 21 (see FIG. 3) are arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. Each board lamp 21 has a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The image display device 23 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The image display device 23 has a display screen 23a capable of displaying an effect image.
On the display screen 23a, it is possible to configure a fourth effect symbol display area (not shown) on which the fourth effect symbol (not shown) is displayed. The fourth staging symbol is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, and symbols.
In the fourth effect symbol display area, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the fourth effect symbol. The variable display of the fourth effect symbol means that the type of the fourth effect symbol displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area is sequentially changed at predetermined time intervals. The stop display of the fourth effect symbol means that one kind of the fourth effect symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth effect symbol display area for a predetermined time.
Further, on the display screen 23a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbols (not shown) are displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol corresponding to the start information during which the notification display (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is being executed is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol corresponding to the start information for which the notification display is suspended is displayed.

The drum type display device 24 has a left side drum 24a, a center drum 24b, and a right side drum 24c arranged coaxially with each other.
Each drum 24a to 24c is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and reel data is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. Each drum 24a to 24c has a rotation axis (not shown) arranged along its central axis. The drums 24a to 24c are arranged so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction (left-right direction shown in FIG. 2) and can be rotated about the rotation axis.
A plurality of first effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction on the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the left drum 24a. Each first effect symbol is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters.
The left drum 24a can display the variation of the first effect symbol and the stop display. The variable display of the first effect symbol means that the first effect symbol displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the left drum 24a is sequentially replaced by the rotation of the left drum 24a. The stop display of the first effect symbol means that when the rotation of the left side drum 24a is stopped, one first effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the left side drum 24a.
A plurality of second staging symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction on the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the central drum 24b. Each second staging symbol is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters.
The central drum 24b can display the variation of the second effect symbol and the stop display. The variable display of the second effect symbol means that the second effect symbol displayed (arranged) at the predetermined stop position corresponding to the central drum 24b is sequentially replaced by the rotation of the central drum 24b. The stop display of the second effect symbol means that one second effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the central drum 24b by stopping the rotation of the central drum 24b.
A plurality of third effect symbols (not shown) are displayed along the rotation direction on the reel data attached to the outer peripheral surface of the right drum 24c. Each third staging symbol is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters.
The right drum 24c can display the variation of the third effect symbol and the stop display. The variable display of the third effect symbol means that the third effect symbol displayed (arranged) at the predetermined stop position corresponding to the right drum 24c is sequentially replaced by the rotation of the right drum 24c. The stop display of the third effect symbol means that when the rotation of the right side drum 24c is stopped, one third effect symbol is displayed (arranged) at a predetermined stop position corresponding to the right side drum 24c.

Further, the drum type display device 24 has a stepping motor (not shown) corresponding to each drum 24a to 24c, and a position detection sensor (not shown) corresponding to each drum 24a to 24c.
Each stepping motor rotates the drums 24a to 24c corresponding to the stepping motor. Each stepping motor is driven in response to a pulse signal input from the staging control circuit 300.
Each position detection sensor outputs a detection signal to the effect control circuit 300 according to the detection of the origin position (rotational position) of the drums 24a to 24c corresponding to the position detection sensor.
Then, the effect control circuit 300 includes a pulse signal (frequency, number of pulses, etc.) output to the stepping motor corresponding to each drum 24a to 24c, a detection signal input from the position detection sensor corresponding to the drum, and a detection signal. Based on, the state of the drum (rotation / stop, rotation direction, rotation speed, type of effect symbol displayed at a predetermined stop position, etc.) is controlled.

A first starting port 51 is provided below the drum-type display device 24 in the game area 30. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and allows the entry of a game ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11. Special FIG. 1 The starting ball detection sensor 101 transmits a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 (FIG. 1) in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first starting port 51 (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51). 3) is output. The main control circuit 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101.
On the left side of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, an upper left other winning opening 55 and a lower left other winning opening 56 are provided. The upper left other winning opening 55 is an entrance opening that opens diagonally upward to the right, and it is possible to enter a game ball at all times. On the other hand, the lower left other winning opening 56 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and it is always possible to enter a game ball. Each of the other winning openings 55 and 56 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
On the back side of the game board 11, a left other winning ball detection sensor 106 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The left other winning ball detection sensor 106 detects a detection signal according to the detection of the game ball that has entered the other winning openings 55 and 56 (the upper left other winning opening 55 or the lower left other winning opening 56). Is output to the main control circuit 200. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left other prize ball detection sensor 106.

A start gate 41 is provided on the right side of the display screen 24a in the game area 30. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 is capable of passing the game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible for the game ball flowing down the left path).
The starting ball detection sensor 104 (see FIG. 3) is arranged at the starting gate 41. The normal start ball detection sensor 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passing the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to an input of a detection signal from the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104.
Below the starting gate 41 in the game area 30, a right other winning opening 57 is provided. The right other winning opening 57 is an entrance opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. The right other winning opening 57 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
On the back side of the game board 11, a right other winning ball detection sensor 107 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The right other winning ball detection sensor 107 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the right other winning opening 57 (the entry of the game ball into the right other winning opening 57). Output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the right other prize ball detection sensor 107.

A second starting opening 52 is provided below the right other winning opening 57 in the game area 30. The second starting port 52 is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52, and enables (easily) entering the game ball into the second starting port 52. An ordinary electric accessory (ordinary electric accessory) 52a (so-called "bello") that can be displaced to the open state is provided. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
In the present embodiment, the second starting port 52 is a substantially rectangular hole that opens toward the front side. The ordinary electric accessory 52a has an opening / closing plate (not shown) for opening / closing the second starting port 52. The opening / closing plate is formed in a substantially square flat plate shape. The opening / closing plate has an opening / closing shaft provided along the lower side thereof. The opening / closing shaft extends in the left-right direction. The opening / closing plate can be displaced (opened / closed) like a door on the upper side of the opening / closing shaft. Specifically, the opening / closing plate can be displaced into a first state in which the second starting port 52 is closed and a second state in which the upper side is tilted toward the front side.
Then, when the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced to the closed state, the opening / closing plate is displaced to the first state, so that the game ball flowing down the right path is prevented from entering the second starting port 52. Displacement. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced to the open state, the opening / closing plate is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball dropped on the back surface of the opening / closing plate is guided to the second starting port 52. ..
The ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened and closed) by the starting port solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the second starting port 52, the normal electric accessory 52a is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter the second starting port 52. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is not allowed to enter. The 52a is set to the open state, and a game ball can be entered.
A special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11. The special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the second start port 52 (the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52). And output. The main control circuit 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102.

A bonus winning device 54 is provided below the second starting port 52 in the game area 30. The accessory winning device 54 has an entry port (not shown) that opens toward the right side, and a special electric accessory 54a (so-called "blade") that opens and closes the entry opening. The accessory winning device 54 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
The special electric accessory 54a is in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the accessory winning device 54, and allows the game ball to enter the accessory winning device 54 (easy). It is possible to displace to the open state.
In the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 54a has an opening / closing piece (not shown) that opens / closes the entrance / closing port.
The opening / closing piece is formed in the shape of a piece having a predetermined length. An opening / closing shaft (not shown) is provided at the lower end of the opening / closing piece. The opening / closing axis extends along the depth direction (the depth direction shown in FIG. 2). The opening / closing piece can be displaced (opened / closed) like a door on the upper end side with the opening / closing shaft as the center. Specifically, the opening / closing piece can be displaced into a first state in which the ball entrance is closed and a second state in which the upper end side is tilted toward the right side.

When the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the closed state, the opening / closing piece is displaced to the first state to prevent the game ball flowing down the right path from entering the accessory winning device 54. Will be done. On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state, the opening / closing piece is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball dropped on the side surface of the opening / closing piece is guided into the accessory winning device 54. Displacement.
The special electric accessory 54a is displaced (opened and closed) by the accessory solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3). In the bonus winning device 54, the special electric bonus 54a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter the game ball. However, in the small hit game described later, the special electric bonus 54a is used. It is in an open state, and it is possible to enter a game ball.
On the back side of the game board 11, a winning ball detection sensor 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. The bonus ball detection sensor 105 sends a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the ball entering the bonus winning device 54) that has entered the bonus winning device 54. And output. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the prize ball detection sensor 105.

The V area (not shown) that can be passed by the game ball, the discharge area (not shown) that can be passed by the game ball, and the ball entering the character winning device 54 are contained in the character winning device 54. A distribution means (not shown) for distributing the played game ball to one of the V region and the discharge region is provided.
A V winning ball detection sensor 108 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V region. The V winning ball detection sensor 108 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of a game ball that has passed through the V region (passage of the V region by the game ball). The main control circuit 200 sets the V winning flag region, which will be described later, in response to the input of the detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108.
The distribution means includes a V-passing state in which the game ball entered in the accessory winning device 54 is distributed to the V region, and a non-V passing state in which the game ball entered in the accessory winning device 54 is distributed to the discharge region. It is possible to displace to.
As a result, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the bonus winning device 54 to pass through the discharge area, and the game that has entered the bonus winning device 54. The sphere is distributed to the V region. On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the bonus winning device 54 to pass through the V region, and the game that has entered the bonus winning device 54. The spheres are distributed to the discharge area. The distribution means is displaced by the V distribution solenoid 67 (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 is distributed to one of the V region and the discharge region by the sorting means, and after passing through one of the V region and the discharge region, it goes to the back side of the game board 11. It is discharged. In the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the prize winning device 54 passes through one of the V region and the discharge region after being detected by the prize winning ball detection sensor 105, and is the back surface of the game board 11. It is discharged to the side.

A large prize-winning device 53 is provided below the prize-winning device 54 in the game area 30. The grand prize device 53 has a ball entry port (not shown) that opens toward the right side, and a special electric accessory 53a (so-called “slide attacker”) that opens and closes the ball entry port. The large prize device 53 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
The special electric accessory 53a makes it possible (easy) to enter the game ball into the large prize device 53 in a closed state that makes it impossible (difficult) to enter the game ball into the large prize device 53. It is possible to displace in the open state.
In the present embodiment, the prize-winning device 53 is provided in a pair of transparent plates (not shown), a game ball receiving portion (not shown) arranged between the pair of transparent plates, and a game ball receiving portion. It has an entrance and a ball entrance. Further, the special electric accessory 53a has an opening / closing plate (not shown) for opening / closing the ball entrance.
Each transparent plate is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent or translucent material. Each transparent plate is arranged substantially in parallel with the front surface (game area 30) of the game board 11. The pair of transparent plates are arranged substantially in parallel with each other. Further, the pair of transparent plates are arranged at predetermined intervals so that the game ball can pass between the pair of transparent plates. A plurality of ridges are provided at a position above the opening / closing plate in front of the transparent plate on the back side. Further, a plurality of ridges are provided at the position above the opening / closing plate on the back surface of the transparent plate on the front side. Each ridge is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction (vertical direction shown in FIG. 2).
The receiving part is formed in a substantially square box shape. At the receiving portion, the upper surface thereof is opened, and a ball entry port that opens toward the upper side is formed.
The opening / closing plate is formed in a substantially square flat plate shape. The opening / closing plate is arranged in a state in which the upper surface thereof is inclined (inclined so that the left side is low and the right side is high). The opening / closing plate can be displaced along the depth direction. Specifically, the opening / closing plate has a first position on the front side of the game board 11 (a first position that closes the ball entrance) via a transparent plate on the back side and a through hole provided in the game board 11. It is possible to displace the game board 11 to a second position on the back side (a second position where the entrance is opened). Here, the first position is a position between the pair of transparent plates.

Then, when the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the closed state, the opening / closing plate is displaced to the first state, so that the game ball flowing down the right path is prevented from entering the large winning device 53. Displacement. At this time, in the large winning device 53, the game ball can be retained (stored) on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. That is, the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate arranged at the first position rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate toward the left side. At this time, the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate comes into contact with each convex strip provided on each transparent plate, so that the rolling speed becomes slower. This makes it possible to retain the game ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate.
On the other hand, when the special electric accessory 53a is displaced to the open state, the opening / closing plate is displaced to the second state, so that the game ball that has fallen on the entry port enters the large winning device 53. Further, when the game ball is staying on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate arranged at the first position and the opening / closing plate is displaced from the first position to the second position, it stays on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate. The game ball is inserted into the large winning device 53.
The special electric accessory 53a is displaced (opened and closed) by the large winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large prize device 53, the special electric accessory 53a is normally closed to prevent the game ball from entering, but in the round game described later, the special electric accessory 53a is in the open state. It is possible to enter a game ball.
A large winning ball detection sensor 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11. The large prize ball detection sensor 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large prize device 53 (the entry of the game ball into the large prize device 53). .. The main control circuit 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the large prize ball detection sensor 103.

A first out port 58 for ejecting a game ball from the game area 30 is provided at the lowermost position in the game area 30. Further, a second out opening 59 for ejecting a game ball from the game area 30 is provided between the upper left other winning opening 55 and the lower left other winning opening 56 in the game area 30.
An out-ball detection sensor 109 (see FIG. 3) is arranged on the back side of the game board 11. The out-ball detection sensor 109 mainly controls the detection signal in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the out ports 58 and 59 (the entry of the game ball into the first out port 58 or the second out port 59). Output to circuit 200. Here, the out-ball detection sensor 109 may be configured to output the detection signal to the effect control circuit 300.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to each entry port 51 to 57 or the start gate 41.

A status display device 63 (see FIG. 3) is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 11. The status display device 63 is composed of an LED or the like. The status display device 63 includes a special figure 1 hold number display, a special figure 2 hold number display, a normal figure hold number display, a round number display, a launch position display, and the like.
On the special figure 1 hold number display, the number of times that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is held (special figure 1 hold number) is displayed. On the special figure 2 hold number display, the number of times that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is held (special figure 2 hold number) is displayed. The number of times the display of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is held (the number of times the normal figure is held) is displayed on the normal figure hold number display. The round number display displays the type of jackpot game state (number of times the round game is executed). The launch position display displays a route (one of the left side route and the right side route) that specifies the launch of the game ball.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 11, a normal drawing display device 60 (see FIG. 3), a special drawing 1 display device 61 (see FIG. 3), and a special drawing 2 display device (see FIG. 3) 62 are placed. It is provided.
Each display device 60, 61, 62 is composed of a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix LED, or the like.
The normal symbol display device 60 can perform variable display and stop display of a normal symbol composed of numbers, symbols, symbols and the like. Then, in the normal symbol display device 60, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. Here, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal map display device 60 becomes a specific symbol, a game state per normal figure, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.
The special figure 1 display device 61 can perform variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, symbols and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device 61, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol which is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device 62 can perform variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, symbols and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device 62, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol which is stopped and displayed.

Here, the display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 and the effect symbol (first effect symbol to the fourth effect) in the image display device 23 and the drum type display device 24 are displayed. The display of the symbol) is associated with each of the time when the variable display is started, the time when the stop display is started, the lottery result indicated by the stopped display symbol, and the like.
Specifically, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol), the variable display of the staging symbol (the first staging symbol to the fourth staging symbol) is started. Further, in response to the start of the stop display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), the stop display of the effect symbol (first effect symbol to fourth effect symbol) is started. At this time, the effect symbols (first effect symbol to fourth effect symbol) are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the stop-displayed special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an abnormality detection sensor (not shown) for detecting various abnormal states. Specifically, as various abnormality detection sensors, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetism, a radio wave detection sensor that detects radio waves, a vibration detection sensor that detects vibrations, an inner frame opening sensor that detects the opening of the inner frame 3, and a door. A glass frame opening sensor or the like for detecting the opening of the unit 4 is included. Then, the various abnormality detection sensors output the detection signal corresponding to the abnormal state to the main control circuit 200 in response to the detection of the various abnormal states.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control circuit 200, an effect control circuit 300, a payout control circuit 400, and a power supply circuit 600 that supplies power to each of the control circuits 200, 300, 400, and the like. And have.
Each control circuit 200, 300, 400 has a CPU (Central Processing Unit), a ROM (Read Only Memory) for storing a program related to the progress of the game, and data necessary for the progress of the game, and a CPU stored in the ROM. It is a microcomputer provided with a RAM (Random Access Memory) which is a temporary storage area used to proceed with processing based on a program. The main control circuit 200, the staging control circuit 300, and the payout control circuit 400 are mounted on separate boards.

The main control circuit 200 includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, an input port 240, an output port 250, a frequency generation circuit 260, and a hard random number generation circuit 270.
The input port 240 is composed of a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, an input port 0, an input port 1, an input port 2 and an input port 3).
A detection signal from each magnetic detection sensor 112, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch, and the like are input to the input port 0.
The input port 1 has a detection signal from the large winning ball detection sensor 103, a detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105, a detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, and a right other winning ball detection sensor 107. A detection signal, a detection signal from the V winning ball detection sensor 108, a detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109, and the like are input.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the start ball detection sensor 101 of the special figure 1, a detection signal from the start ball detection sensor 102 of the special figure 2, a detection signal from the start ball detection sensor 104 of the normal figure, and a power cutoff detection circuit. A power cutoff warning signal or the like is input.
A control command from the payout control circuit 400 is input to the input port 3.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 2) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor). In each reception storage area, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is set. Specifically, "1" is set in each reception storage area when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is input, and "1" is set when the signal corresponding to the reception storage area is not input. 0 "is set.

The output port 250 is composed of a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, an output port 0, an output port 1 and an output port 2).
The output port 0 outputs a control signal to each display device 60 to 63, each solenoid 64 to 67, and the like.
The output port 1 transmits a control command to the effect control circuit 300.
The output port 2 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400. Further, the output port 2 outputs external information (information regarding the payout of prize balls, information regarding the occurrence of an error (abnormal state), etc.) to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. ..

The output port 1 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits it as serial data to the staging control circuit 300.

The ROM 220 stores a program related to the progress of the game and data necessary for the progress of the game. In particular, the ROM 220 stores, as data necessary for the progress of the game, a lottery table for executing various lottery, various control commands necessary for controlling the effect control circuit 300, and the like.
The RAM 230 temporarily stores input / output data in the main control circuit 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing game states, and the like.
In particular, the RAM 230 stores start information acquired by inputting detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101, the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102, and the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104. An area is provided. Here, the start information refers to information such as various random numbers acquired with the input of each detection signal as a trigger.
Specifically, as the start information storage area, it is possible to store the start information (hereinafter referred to as "normal figure start information") acquired by the input of the detection signal from the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104. It is possible to store the start information storage area and the start information acquired by the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 start information"). It is possible to store the special figure 1 start information storage area and the start information acquired by the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 start information"). It has a possible special figure 2 start information storage area.
In the special figure 1 start information storage area and the special figure 2 start information storage area, the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) is limited to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment), respectively. It is possible to memorize.

The frequency generation circuit 260 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the hard random number generation circuit 270. The hard random number generation circuit 270 generates each of a winning random number in the normal symbol lottery, a winning random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a winning random number in the second special symbol lottery. The hard random number generation circuit 270 updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260, so that the winning random number is generated. To generate. In the present embodiment, the value of the loop counter of the hard random number generation circuit 270 is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The loop counter is set to correspond to each of the normal symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery, and the second special symbol lottery.

The staging control circuit 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input port, and an output port.
The effect control circuit 300 displays the effect image on the image display device 23 and drives (rotates) each drum 24a to 24c (each stepping motor) on the drum type display device 24 based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. , The lighting of the lamps 20 and 21, the output of the effect sound from the sound generator 22 and the like are controlled.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the staging control circuit 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control circuit 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control circuit 300 determines the content of the effect to be executed based on the control command received from the main control circuit 200. Then, display control data, motor control data, lamp control data, sound control data, and the like are generated according to the effect control table (effect program) corresponding to the determined content of the effect. Then, the control signal based on each generated control data is output to the image display device 23, the drum type display device 24 (each stepping motor), the lamps 20, 21, and the sound generator 22.

The payout control circuit 400 controls the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 based on the detection signal input from the firing volume.
Specifically, the payout control circuit 400 controls the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 so that the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area 30 with the strength corresponding to the detection signal input from the firing volume. do.
Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control command received from the main control circuit 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit 500.
Specifically, the ball lending button 7a transmits a ball lending operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the ball lending operation signal, the CR unit 500 subtracts the frequency required for paying out a predetermined number of ball lending from the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the inserted prepaid card. Along with updating the record of the remaining frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card, a ball lending instruction signal instructing the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400 via the connection board 410. Further, the payout control circuit 400 controls the payout operation of the game balls by the game ball payout device 440 so as to pay out a predetermined number of game balls when the ball lending instruction signal is received.
The CR unit 500 transmits a frequency signal indicating the residual frequency of the valuable medium when the prepaid cart is inserted and when the record of the residual frequency of the valuable medium in the prepaid card is updated, via the connection board 410. It is transmitted to the display device 7c. Then, when the frequency display device 7c receives the frequency signal, the frequency display device 7c displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium indicated by the frequency signal.
The return button 7b transmits a return operation signal to the CR unit 500 via the connection board 410 in response to the pressing operation. Then, when the CR unit 500 receives the return operation signal, it returns (discharges) the prepaid card in which the remaining frequency of the valuable medium remains.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the start gate 41. Then, when the normal symbol lottery is won, a game state is generated per normal symbol. In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.
In the present embodiment, one type of "per normal figure" is set as the type of the game state per normal figure that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won.

When the "normal symbol hit" is won by the ordinary symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 60 is controlled to stop and display the ordinary symbol at the "normal symbol per symbol".
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost, the normal symbol display device 60 is controlled so that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed by the "missing symbol".
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time reduction control, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped. Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is extended (the number of times of opening is increased) in the game state per normal figure as compared with the time reduction control being stopped.
When the "per-figure" is won, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0. It is set to .5 [s] or 2.0 [s]. At this time, during the execution of the time reduction control, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 3 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 2.0 [s]. ] Is set. On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, the number of times the ordinary electric accessory 52a is opened is set to 1 [times], and the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 52a at each opening is 0.5 [s]. Is set to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed.
As shown in FIG. 4A, in the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the special symbol lottery (each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery), "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". ", Is set.
In the first special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "big hit" is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the "small hit" is set to 0/199, and the probability of winning the "missing" (lost) is set. , 198/199.
In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning the "big hit" is set to 1/199, the probability of winning the "small hit" is set to 198/199, and the probability of winning the "missing" (lost) is set. , 0/199.
Then, when the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state occurs. In the big hit game state, the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the big prize device 53.
In addition, when a "small hit" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a small hit game state occurs. In the small hit game state, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the accessory winning device 54. Then, when the passage of the V region by the game ball entering the bonus winning device 54 is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state occurs after the end of the small hit gaming state. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 4B, in the present embodiment, "big hit 1" and "big hit 2" are set as the type of "big hit" (the winning type selected when the "big hit" is won). There is.
In this embodiment, in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the selection probabilities (winning probabilities) of each winning type (each type of "big hit") when the "big hit" is won are the same. It is set.
Specifically, when the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery, the probability that "big hit 1" is selected is set to 40 [%], and the probability that "big hit 2" is selected is 60 [. %] Is set.
Further, as shown in FIG. 4C, in the present embodiment, as the type of "small hit" (winning type selected when the "small hit" is won), "small hit 1" to "small hit". 6 ”is set.
In the present embodiment, when the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, the probability that "small hit 1" is selected is set to 3 [%], and "small hit 2" is selected. The probability is set to 5 [%], the probability that "small hit 3" is selected is set to 12 [%], and the probability that "small hit 4" is selected is set to 10 [%]. , The probability that "small hit 5" is selected is set to 30 [%], and the probability that "small hit 6" is selected is set to 40 [%].
In this embodiment, the "small hit" is not won by the first special symbol lottery. However, there may be a configuration in which a "small hit" can be won by the first special symbol lottery. In such a configuration, the selection probability (winning probability) of each winning type (each type of "small hit") when the "small hit" is won in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery. Can be the same as each other or different from each other.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 are controlled to stop and display the special symbol with the "big hit 1 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "big hit 1 symbol".
When the "big hit 2" is won, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 are controlled to stop and display the special symbol with the "big hit 2 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed by "big hit 2 symbols".
In the present embodiment, the "big hit 1 symbol" and the "big hit 2 symbol" are identified by the same type of combination of the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. It is a mode in which information (for example, "7,7,7") is prepared.

When the "small hit 1" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls to stop and display the special symbol with the "small hit 1 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "small hit 1 symbol".
When the "small hit 2" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the "small hit 2 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed by "small hit 2 symbols".
When the "small hit 3" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls to stop and display the special symbol with the "small hit 3 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "small hit 3 symbols".
In the present embodiment, the "small hit 1 symbol" to "small hit 3 symbol" have the same type of combination of the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. (For example, "7,7,7") is used for all the identification information.
When the "small hit 4" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed by the "small hit 4 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "small hit 4 symbols".
When the "small hit 5" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls to stop and display the special symbol with the "small hit 5 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "small hit 5 symbols".
When the "small hit 6" is won, the special figure 2 display device 62 controls to stop and display the special symbol with the "small hit 6 symbol". In addition, the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol are controlled to be stopped and displayed with "small hit 6 symbols".
In the present embodiment, the "small hit 4 symbols" to "small hit 6 symbols" are at least one of the first effect symbols to the third effect symbols stopped and displayed at the predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c. The type of the effect symbol is a combination different from the types of other effect symbols (for example, "7, bell, 7").

When "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 2" is won, a predetermined number of round games are executed in the big hit game state.
In the present embodiment, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2" is won, 5 [times] round games are executed during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
In each round game, a predetermined maximum opening time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and a large prize is awarded during the round game. The game is terminated when one of the conditions that the number of game balls entering the device 53 reaches a predetermined upper limit (7 [balls] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.
Further, when the "big hit 1" is won, the time saving control is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In this case, the time reduction control is started when the jackpot gaming state ends, and ends when a predetermined time reduction end condition is satisfied.
In this embodiment, (1) a "big hit" was won by a special symbol lottery, (2) a V prize (passing the V region by a game ball) was detected during the occurrence of a small hit gaming state, and (3). ) The total number of fluctuations executed during the time reduction control has reached the predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in this embodiment), and (4) the special figure 2 variation executed during the time reduction control. When one of the conditions that the number of times reaches a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment) is satisfied, it is determined that the time reduction end condition is satisfied.
Here, the "total number of fluctuations" is the number of notification displays (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol based on the first special symbol lottery, and the notification display (variation display and) of the special symbol based on the second special symbol lottery. Stop display) and the total.
"Special figure 2 change number" means the number of times of notification display (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol based on the second special symbol lottery.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the time reduction control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. Will be executed. In this case, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is terminated when the above-mentioned time saving ending condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the time reduction control is performed after the end of the jackpot game state. Not executed.

When "small hit 1" to "small hit 6" are won, the small hit game is executed a predetermined number of times (1 [times] in this embodiment) in the small hit game state.
In each small hit game, the maximum opening time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) set after the special electric accessory 54a is opened has elapsed, and the small hit game is in progress. The number of balls to be entered into the prize winning device 54 in the above-mentioned game has reached a predetermined upper limit (7 [balls] in the present embodiment), and the process is terminated when one of the conditions is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, as the types of small hit games, a game in which a V prize can be won and a game in which a V prize cannot be won are set.
The "V winning game" is a type of small hit game in which the game ball that has entered the accessory winning device 54 during the execution of the small hit game can pass through the V region (easily). Specifically, in the V winning game, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state during the period in which the distribution means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the V passing state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the bonus winning device 54 during the execution of the V winning game is distributed to the V region by the sorting means and passes through the V region.
The "V winning impossible game" is a type of small hit game in which it is impossible (difficult) for the game ball that has entered the accessory winning device 54 to pass through the V region during the execution of the small hit game. .. Specifically, in the V-winning impossible game, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced to the open state during the period in which the distribution means of the accessory winning device 54 is displaced to the non-V passing state. As a result, the game ball that has entered the bonus winning device 54 during the execution of the V-winning impossible game is distributed to the discharge area by the sorting means and does not pass through the V area.
When "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are won, the small hit game executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state includes the V winning game. In the present embodiment, when "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are won, 1 [times] V winning game is executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state.
When "small hit 4" to "small hit 6" are won, the small hit game executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state does not include the V winning game. In the present embodiment, when "small hit 4" to "small hit 6" are won, 1 [times] V-winning impossible game is executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state.

If the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state is generated after the end of the small hit gaming state.
If the "small hit 1" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 15 [times] round games are executed.
If the "small hit 2" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 10 [times] round games are executed.
If the "small hit 3" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 5 [times] round games are executed.
If the "small hit 4" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 15 [times] round games are executed.
If the "small hit 5" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 10 [times] round games are executed.
If the "small hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, in the big hit gaming state generated after the end of the small hit gaming state. 5 [times] round games are executed.
As described above, in each round game, a predetermined maximum opening time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed since the special electric accessory 53a was opened, and the round concerned. The game is terminated when one of the conditions that the number of game balls entered into the large winning device 53 during the game reaches a predetermined upper limit (7 [balls] in this embodiment) is satisfied.

In addition, if "small hit 1" to "small hit 6" are won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, after the end of the small hit gaming state. After the end of the jackpot game state that occurs, the time reduction control is executed. In this case, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and is terminated when the above-mentioned time saving ending condition is satisfied.

(About control commands)
Next, a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the staging control circuit 300 and a control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 will be described.
The main control circuit 200 and the staging control circuit 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control circuit 200 and the staging control circuit 300 is performed in only one direction from the main control circuit 200 to the staging control circuit 300, and the communication from the staging control circuit 300 to the main control circuit 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the staging control circuit 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the staging control circuit 300 by serial communication. In the staging control circuit 300, when a control command is received from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the effect control circuit 300 include a symbol type designation command, a first fluctuation pattern designation command, a second fluctuation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, and a game state designation. Command, hold number specification command, opening specification command, round start specification command, round end specification command, ending specification command, V prize specification command, first look-ahead specification command, second look-ahead specification command, third look-ahead specification command, out specification A command, a right-handed notification start specification command, a right-handed notification end specification command, a time reduction control start specification command, a time reduction control end specification command, a continuous change period start specification command, a continuous change period end specification command, and the like are set.
The symbol type designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol (lottery result of the special symbol lottery). The symbol type specification command is a special symbol stop symbol type such as "missing symbol", "big hit p symbol" (one of "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol") or "small hit q symbol". (One of "1 small hit symbol" to "6 small hit symbols") is specified. The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command are commands for designating the variation pattern type (variation pattern number) of the special symbol, respectively. In the present embodiment, the first fluctuation pattern designation command and the second fluctuation pattern designation command each specify a fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the fluctuation pattern number by designating the fluctuation pattern number. ..
The first fluctuation pattern designation command specifies a fluctuation pattern for the first half of the fluctuation display of the effect symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first fluctuation pattern").
In the present embodiment, as the first fluctuation pattern, m (plural) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the first variation pattern designation command specifies one of m types of first variation patterns.
The second fluctuation pattern designation command specifies a fluctuation pattern (hereinafter referred to as “second fluctuation pattern”) in the latter half of the fluctuation display of the effect symbols z1 and z2.
In the present embodiment, as the second fluctuation pattern, n (plural) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the second variation pattern designation command specifies one of the n types of second variation patterns.
The first variation pattern designation command and the second variation pattern designation command are transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

The stop specification command is a command that specifies the stop display of a special symbol. The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol. The stop designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
The "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, each combination of the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous jackpot symbol flag area, and the value of the jackpot after rotation speed counter is used. The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, and the like.

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, and the like. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device 61. Further, the “special figure 2 hold number” means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device 62.
The hold number specification command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the start information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. In the present embodiment, as the hold number designation command, a command corresponding to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is set.

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (the opening period of the big hit gaming state or the opening period of the small hit gaming state). The opening designation command is the type of jackpot game state to start (one of "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot", "big hit 1" and "big hit 2") or the small hit game to start. Specify the type of state (one of "small hit 1" to "small hit 6"). The opening specification command is sent at the beginning of the opening period.
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a round game or the start of a small hit game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of the round game or the start of the small hit game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of the round game or the end of the small hit game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the round game or at the end of the small hit game.
The ending designation command is a command for designating the start of the ending period (the ending period of the big hit gaming state or the ending period of the small hit gaming state). The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V prize designation command is a command for designating the passage of the V region (V prize) by the game ball. The V prize designation command is transmitted when the game ball detects the passage of the V region.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol. The first look-ahead designation command is the type of stop symbol of the special symbol, "missing symbol", "big hit p symbol" (one of "big hit 1 symbol" and "big hit 2 symbol") or "small hit q symbol". "(One of" 1 small hit symbol "to" 6 small hit symbols ") is specified. In the present embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the content of the first fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the second look-ahead designation command has an indefinite fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern indefinite”) or one of m types of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern m”). ") Is specified. The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the content of the second fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command is one in which the second fluctuation pattern is indefinite (“variation pattern indefinite”) or one of n types of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) (“variation”). Pattern n ") is specified. The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the start information is stored.
The out designation command is a command for designating the entry (discharge) of a game ball into the out openings 58 and 59. The out designation command is transmitted in response to the input of the detection signal from the out ball detection sensor 109.
The right-handed notification start specification command is a command that specifies the start of right-handed notification. The right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of right-handed notification.
The right-handed notification end specification command is a command for designating the end of right-handed notification. The right-handed notification end specification command is transmitted at the end of right-handed notification.
The time saving control start specification command is a command that specifies the start of time saving control. The time saving control start specification command is transmitted at the start of the time saving control.
The time saving control end specification command is a command for specifying the end of time saving control. The time saving control end specification command is transmitted at the end of the time saving control.
The continuous chan period start specification command is a command that specifies the start of the continuous chan period. The command for specifying the start of the continuous chan period is sent at the start of the continuous chan period.
The continuous chan period end specification command is a command that specifies the end of the continuous chan period. The command for specifying the end of the continuous chan period is sent at the end of the continuous chan period.

The main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted / received between the main control circuit 200 and the payout control circuit 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control circuit 200 transmits a control command to the payout control circuit 400 by serial communication. When the payout control circuit 400 receives a control command from the main control circuit 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a control command to the main control circuit 200 by serial communication. In the main control circuit 200, when a control command is received from the payout control circuit 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.
In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 2, 3, 4 or 10) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted at the time of executing the prize ball payout operation by the payout control circuit 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200, the occurrence / cancellation of a payout error, the occurrence / cancellation of a full tank error, the occurrence / cancellation of a ball jam error, etc. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed by the main control circuit 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control circuit 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured in the main control circuit 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the hard random number generation circuit 270 has a loop counter value every time one clock is input from the frequency generation circuit 260 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]). Is started in the hard random number update process for updating by "1" within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535). Then, by the hard random number update process, each of the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, and the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery is updated. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the hard random number generation circuit 270 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.
Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift register of the output port 1 (output port 250) transmits a control command stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control circuit 300. Start processing. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the output port 1 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control circuit 200 based on a program (software) related to the progress of the game stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. When the CPU initialization process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the settings required to execute various processes are made.
Specifically, in the initial setting process, the start address of the stack area is set in the stack pointer. In addition, a vector interrupt mode is set as the interrupt mode.
In step S1-2, the wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait time setting process, a predetermined wait process time is set in the timer counter. Then, the measurement of the set wait processing time by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, the RAM clear signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-4. In the RAM clear signal read process, the RAM clear signal is read.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a ram clear switch (not shown). Then, when the power is turned on while the ram clear switch is being pressed, the ram clear signal is input to the input port 240 (input port 0).
In the RAM clear signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the receive storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal of the input port 240 is read.

In step S1-4, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-5. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-4 is repeated.
In step S1-5, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the RAM access permission process, a process necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the CPU 210 is in a state where access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 is permitted.
In steps S1-6, it is determined whether or not the ram clear signal is input based on the value read in step S1-3 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the ram clear signal), and the ram clear signal is output. If it is determined that the signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and if it is determined that the ram clear signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-16.

In step S1-7, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is saved in the power cutoff occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230, and if it is determined that the power cutoff occurrence information is saved (Yes), step S1-7. When the process proceeds to S1-8 and it is determined that the power cutoff occurrence information is not saved (No), the process proceeds to step S1-16.
In step S1-8, the checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-9. In the checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Here, the "backup information" is stored in all the work areas (work areas including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 except the power cutoff occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area. Refers to information.
In step S1-9, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-8 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-10. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-16.
Here, if the checksum value calculated in step S1-8 matches the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is normal, and step S1 If the checksum value calculated in -8 does not match the checksum value stored in the checksum buffer area, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-10, the power cutoff occurrence information release process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-11. In the power cutoff occurrence information release process, the power cutoff occurrence information set in the power cutoff occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230 is canceled (erased).
In step S1-11, the game state return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-12. In the game state return process, various values are set in the work area of the RAM 230 based on the backup information, and the game state when the occurrence of power cutoff is detected is returned.
Specifically, in the game state return process, the values of various flags (time reduction control flag, V winning flag, previous jackpot symbol flag, special game phase flag, normal game phase flag, etc.) are set based on the backup information. , Set the values of various counters (such as the number of rotations after the big hit).
As a result, the information stored in the RAM 230 is restored to the state when the occurrence of the power cutoff is detected based on the backup information.
In step S1-12, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-13. In the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored, the subcommand (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the staging control circuit 300) that specifies that the power has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
In step S1-13, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, the payout command (control command transmitted from the main control circuit 200 to the payout control circuit 400) that specifies that the power has been restored is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.

In step S1-14, the effect return subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the effect start subcommand transmission process, the effect return subcommand (power return phase designation command, game state designation command, etc.) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the "power return phase designation command" is a control command for designating a special game phase for returning the effect.
In the effect return subcommand transmission process, first, the current special game phase is confirmed based on the value of the special game phase flag set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. Then, the power return phase specification command for designating the confirmed special game phase is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In addition, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. Specifically, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the big hit post-rotation speed counter are confirmed, and the confirmation result corresponds to this. Calculate the game state offset value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-15, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt initial setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, the CPU 210 sets an interrupt vector register, and also sets an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) in the CTC.

In step S1-16, the RAM clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the RAM clear process, the RAM 230 is initialized.
Specifically, in the RAM clear process, the information stored in the RAM 230 (excluding the prohibited area) is cleared (erased). As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 230 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Specifically, in a predetermined area of the RAM 230, predetermined initial values are set as values of various flags (time reduction control flag, V winning flag, previous jackpot symbol flag, special game phase flag, normal game phase flag, etc.). , A predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of various counters (counter for the number of rotations after a big hit, etc.).
In step S1-17, the RAM clearing subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-18. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-18, the payout command transmission process at the time of RAM clear is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the RAM clear payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-15) shown in FIG. 5 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. When the main loop process is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In interrupt prohibition processing, the interrupt prohibition state that prohibits interrupts of other processing is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, the execution of the power cutoff save processing, the timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of the soft random number (hit symbol random number, fluctuation pattern random number, etc.) which is a random number generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the payout control circuit 400 (control command transmitted from the payout control circuit 400 to the main control circuit 200) is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 250 (output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the staging control circuit 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, the interrupt enable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition processing in step S2-1, execution of the power cutoff save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted. It is the interrupt permission period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the winning symbol random numbers (variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the evacuation process when the power is cut off.
A power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown) is connected to the power supply circuit 600. Then, the power supply cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied by the power supply circuit 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the main control circuit 300 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value. ..
Upon receiving the power cutoff warning signal, the CPU 210 starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 7 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. When the evacuation process when the power is cut off is started, first, the process proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not (bit check) is performed and it is determined that the power cutoff warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4 and it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal has not been input. In (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 250 (output port 0 to output port 2) is stopped. Further, the input of the detection signal to the input port 240 (input port 0 to input port 3) is stopped.
In step S3-5, the checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the checksum saving process, the checksum is calculated for the information stored in all the areas of the work area of the RAM 230 except the power cutoff occurrence information flag area and the checksum buffer area. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum buffer area.
In step S3-6, the power cutoff occurrence information setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the power cutoff occurrence information setting process, the power cutoff occurrence information is set (saved) in the power cutoff occurrence information flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-7, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-9, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 240 is read.
In step S3-10, is the power cutoff notice signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is input (Yes). Goes to step S3-8.
In step S3-11, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the return determination loop counter is newly set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address specified by the stack pointer).

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The frequency generation circuit 260 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 8 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop processing in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.
In step S4-3, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. In the dynamic port output process, a control signal is output to each display device 60 to 63 (each LED).
Specifically, in the dynamic port output process, the drive information (drive signal) set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, each display device 60 to 63 (each LED) is lighting-controlled by the dynamic lighting method based on the drive signal set in the dynamic port output request buffer.

In step S4-4, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the latest switch status is accurately acquired.
Here, the RAM 230 is set with an input port 0 state flag area, an input port 1 state flag area, and an input port 2 state flag area.
The input port 0 state flag area is configured to include a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 0. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (a state in which a signal is input or a state in which a signal is not input) of a signal (detection sensor) corresponding to the switch state storage area is indicated. "1" or "0") is set.
Specifically, when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, "1" is set, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Occasionally, "0" is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 0 state flag area is from the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the radio wave detection sensor, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from each magnetic detection sensor, and the vibration detection sensor. The switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the inner frame open sensor, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the glass frame open sensor, and the RAM clear switch. It is configured to include a switch state storage area corresponding to the RAM clear signal from.

The input port 1 state flag area is configured to include a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating the switch state of the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set.
Specifically, when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, "1" is set, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Occasionally, "0" is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 1 state flag area is a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the large winning ball detection sensor 103 and a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105. The switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, the switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107, and the V winning ball detection sensor 108. It is configured to include a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal and a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-ball detection sensor 109.

The input port 2 state flag area is configured to include a switch state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each switch state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating the switch state of the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is set.
Specifically, when the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is input to each switch state storage area, "1" is set, and the signal corresponding to the switch state storage area is not input. Occasionally, "0" is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 state flag area is a switch state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 and a switch corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. It is configured to include a state storage area, a switch state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and a switch state storage area corresponding to a power cutoff warning signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. There is.

Further, the RAM 230 is set with an input port 1 on detection flag area and an input port 2 on detection flag area.
The input port 1 on detection flag area is configured to include an on-state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 1. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether or not an on-state has been detected for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set.
Specifically, in each on-state storage area, "1" is set when the on-state is detected for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and the on-state is set for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. If it is not detected, "0" is set.
Here, the "on state" means a state in which the signal has changed from a state in which the signal has not been input to a state in which the signal has been input.
In the present embodiment, the input port 1 on detection flag area has an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the large winning ball detection sensor 103 and an on-state storage corresponding to the detection signal from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105. From the area, the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106, the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107, and the V winning ball detection sensor 108. It is configured to include an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the above and an on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-ball detection sensor 109.
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the large winning ball detection sensor 103 is referred to as "large winning opening switch bit data", and is referred to from the accessory winning ball detection sensor 105. The value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of is defined as "feature switch bit data", and the value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the left other winning ball detection sensor 106. Is set as "left other winning opening switch bit data", and the value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is set as "right other winning opening switch bit data", and V prize is won. The value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 108 is set as "V winning switch bit data", and is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the out-ball detection sensor 109. The value is "outswitch bit data".
That is, the input port 1 on detection flag (value set in the input port 1 on detection flag area) includes the large winning opening switch bit data, the accessory switch bit data, the left other winning opening switch bit data, and the right. It is configured to include other winning opening switch bit data, V winning switch bit data, and out switch bit data.

The input port 2 on detection flag area is configured to include an on-state storage area corresponding to each signal (each detection sensor) input to the input port 2. In each on-state storage area, 1-bit data (“1” or “0”) indicating whether or not an on-state has been detected for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area is set.
Specifically, in each on-state storage area, "1" is set when the on-state is detected for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area, and the on-state is set for the signal corresponding to the on-state storage area. If it is not detected, "0" is set.
In the present embodiment, the input port 2 on detection flag area corresponds to the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 and the detection signal from the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. It is configured to include an on-state storage area, an on-state storage area corresponding to a detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104, and an on-state storage area corresponding to a power cutoff warning signal from the power cutoff detection circuit. ing.
In the following description, the value set (stored) in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is referred to as “first starting port switch bit data”, and special drawing 2 starting ball is used. The value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the detection sensor 102 is set as the "second start port switch bit data", and the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal from the normal start ball detection sensor 104 is set. The value set in is referred to as "gate switch bit data", and the value set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal from the power cutoff detection circuit is referred to as "power cutoff switch bit data".
That is, the input port 2 on detection flag (value set in the input port 2 on detection flag area) includes the first start port switch bit data, the second start port switch bit data, the gate switch bit data, and the power supply. It is configured to include cutoff switch bit data.

In the port input process, first, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 0 is read. Then, based on the read value, the value of each switch state storage area in the input port 0 state flag area is updated.
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is set. When "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area (value set in the process according to the previous step S4-4), the input port 1 is turned on. Update the value (each switch bit data) of each on-state storage area of the detection flag area.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (value set in the process according to the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal are set. Check the set value and. Then, for each signal, when "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal is set. "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the above, and "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, "other cases" means that "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. , When "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the receive storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal. It means that "1" is set in the storage area and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 1 state flag area is updated based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 1).
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is set. When "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
As a result, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is "0", and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is "0". If it is "1", "1" is set in the on-state storage area in step S4-4 this time (the on-state is detected).

Next, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2 is read. Then, based on the read value and the value set in each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area (value set in the process according to the previous step S4-4), the input port 2 is turned on. The value (switch bit data) of each on-state storage area in the detection flag area is updated.
Specifically, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal (value set in the process according to the previous step S4-4) and the reception storage area corresponding to the signal are set. Check the set value and. Then, for each signal, when "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, the signal is set. "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the above, and "0" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the signal in other cases.
Here, "other cases" means that "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal. , When "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal and "0" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal, and the switch state corresponding to the signal. It means that "1" is set in the storage area and "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to the signal.
Next, the value of each switch state storage area of the input port 2 state flag area is updated based on the read value (value set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal of the input port 2).
Specifically, when "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each signal, "1" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal, and the reception storage corresponding to the signal is set. When "0" is set in the area, "0" is set in the switch state storage area corresponding to the signal.
As a result, for each signal, the value set in the switch state storage area in the previous step S4-4 is "0", and the value set in the switch state storage area in the current step S4-4 is "0". If it is "1", "1" is set in the on-state storage area in step S4-4 this time (the on-state is detected).

In step S4-5, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the timer update process, various timers are updated. Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, external information timer, error timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-6, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-7. The initial value random number update process in step S4-6 is the same as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2. Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-7, the winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-8. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-8, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-9. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each start ball detection sensor 101, 102, 104 is executed. The switch management process will be described later.
In step S4-9, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the special game management process, the operations of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 and the operations of the special electric accessories 53a and 54a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-10, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. In the ordinary game management process, the operation of the normal drawing display device 60 and the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-11, the error management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the error management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined and settings are made according to the determination results.

In step S4-12, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) is executed according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each detection sensor 101 to 103, 105 to 107, 109.
Specifically, in the winning opening switch processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the large winning ball detection sensor 103 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the large prize ball detection sensor 103 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 1 described later is newly added to the prize ball control counter. Set to 1.
In the winning opening switch processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the winning ball detection sensor 105 for the accessory has been detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the prize ball detection sensor 105 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 1 is newly added to the prize ball control counter 1. Set to.
In the winning opening switch processing, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the left other winning ball detection sensor 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the upper left other winning ball detection sensor 106 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 2 described later is newly controlled. Set to counter 2.
In the winning opening switch processing, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the right other winning ball detection sensor 107 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 2 is newly added to the prize ball control counter 2. Set to.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 3 described later is newly added to the prize ball. Set to the control counter 3. Further, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the start port counter for external information is newly used for external information. Set to the start port counter.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the prize ball control counter 4 described later is newly added to the prize ball. Set to the control counter 4. Further, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the starting port counter for external information is newly added for external information. Set to the start port counter.
In the winning opening switch process, it is next determined whether or not the on state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected. When it is determined that the ON state of the out-ball detection sensor 109 is detected, the value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the external information out-switch counter is newly added to the external information out-switch counter. Set to.

In step S4-13, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-12, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the winning devices 53 and 54 is stored, and the number of ball game balls entered in the other winning openings 55 to 57 are used. The prize ball control counter 2 to be stored, the prize ball control counter 3 to store the number of ball game balls entered into the first starting port 51, and the number of ball game balls entered into the second starting port 52 are stored. The prize ball control counter 4 and the like are set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, when the payout control circuit 400 completes the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control circuit 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control circuit 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (3 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (2 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control circuit 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-14, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. The launch position designation management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer 700 is set.
Specifically, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the external information indicating that the number of balls entering the start ports 51 and 52 has reached the predetermined number is transmitted to the port of the RAM 230. Stored in the output request buffer. After that, a predetermined value (1 [sphere] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port counter for external information.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the outswitch counter for external information has reached a predetermined value. Then, when it is determined that the value of the out switch counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the RAM 230 provides external information indicating that the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection sensor 109 has reached the predetermined number. Stored in the port output request buffer. After that, a predetermined value is subtracted from the value of the outswitch counter for external information.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information timer (timer counter) is "1" or more. When it is determined that the value of the external information timer is "1" or more, the external information indicating the occurrence of the abnormal state is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-16, the test signal management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the test signal management process, test information (test signal) is set.
Specifically, in the test signal management process, test information indicating an internal state (big hit game state, small hit game state, execution state of time saving control, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-17, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the LED display setting process, drive information (drive signal) for controlling lighting of each display device 60 to 63 (each LED) is set in the dynamic port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-18, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the solenoid data setting process, the drive information (drive signal) output to each solenoid 64 to 67 is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S4-19, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer 700, each solenoid 64 to 67, and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 250 (output port 0). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer 700 via the payout control circuit 400 and the external terminal board 420. Further, the solenoids 64 to 67 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-20, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register return processing, the value of the register saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address specified by the stack pointer).

Next, the switch management process in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 9, first, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104 is detected (Yes), the step is taken. If it is determined in S5-2 that the ON state of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
Here, when "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 (when the gate switch bit data of the input port 2 on detection flag is "1"). When it is determined that the on state of the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104 is detected and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the normal figure start ball detection sensor 104 (input port). 2 When the gate switch bit data of the ON detection flag is “0”), it is determined that the ON state of the normal start ball detection sensor 104 has not been detected.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected, and when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 is detected (Yes). , Step S5-4, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 starting ball detection sensor 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
Here, when "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 (the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 on detection flag is "1". In the case of If is (when the first start port switch bit data of the input port 2 on detection flag is “0”), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start ball detection sensor 101 is not detected.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, and when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected (Yes). , Step S5-6, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
Here, when "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 (the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 on detection flag is "1". In the case of), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102 is detected, and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the special figure 2 starting ball detection sensor 102. If (when the second start port switch bit data of the input port 2 on detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start ball detection sensor 102 has not been detected.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. Special figure 2 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is detected (Yes), step S5-. If it is determined in step 8 that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-9.
Here, when "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (when the V winning switch bit data of the input port 1 on detection flag is "1"). When it is determined that the on state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 is detected and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 (input port 1 is on). When the V winning switch bit data of the detection flag is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the V winning ball detection sensor 108 has not been detected.
In step S5-8, the V winning ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. In the V prize detection process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit game state is occurring.
Then, when it is determined that the small hit game state is occurring, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230. In addition, the V prize designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit game state is not occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process.
Here, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, is the special game phase (“pre-opening state”, “opening control state”) related to the small hit game state. , "Character closure enabled state" or "Character opening end wait state"), it is determined that a small hit game state is occurring, and a value corresponding to another special game phase. If is, it is determined that the small hit game state is not occurring.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected, and if it is determined that the on state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected (Yes), step S5-10 is performed. If it is determined that the on state of the out-ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9).
Here, when "1" is set in the on-state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out-ball detection sensor 109 (when the out-switch bit data of the input port 1 on detection flag is "1"). , When it is determined that the on state of the out ball detection sensor 109 is detected and "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the detection signal of the out ball detection sensor 109 (input port 1 on detection flag out). When the switch bit data is "0"), it is determined that the ON state of the out-ball detection sensor 109 has not been detected.
In step S5-10, the out-ball detection process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-9). In the out-ball detection process, the out-designated command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 10, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to a normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“1” in the present embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold count counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes are terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.
In step S6-4, the random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure start information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure start information.

Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a special figure 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 11, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 12, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or the number reserved in Special Figure 2.
In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as big hit random numbers, big hit symbol random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7).

In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold count counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold count counter (special figure 1 hold count counter or special figure 2 hold count counter) specified by the address set in the hold count counter address area. The value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set in the special figure hold count counter.
In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 start information storage area).
At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special figure 1 start information) are stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. If the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers (special figure 2 start information) are stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the special figure 1 hold number has increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is given to the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or S5-7). In the pre-determination process, based on the start information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) stored in the special figure start information storage area in step S9-6 (hereinafter referred to as “pre-determination start information”). Various lottery results are judged in advance.
In the present embodiment, with respect to the start information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first look-ahead designation command based on the start information, The second look-ahead designation command and the third look-ahead designation command are not transmitted.
Further, with respect to the special figure 2 start information acquired (stored) while the time reduction control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first look-ahead designation command, the second look-ahead designation command and the second look-ahead designation command based on the start information are not executed. The third look-ahead specification command is not sent.
Further, with respect to the special figure 1 start information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time reduction control, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the first look-ahead designation command, the second look-ahead designation command and the second look-ahead designation command based on the start information are not executed. The third look-ahead specification command is not sent.
As a result of the above, when the special figure 1 start information is acquired (stored) during the non-occurrence of the big hit game state and the small hit game state and while the time reduction control is stopped, various lottery is performed based on the start information. The preliminary determination of the result is executed, and the first look-ahead designation command, the second look-ahead designation command, and the third look-ahead designation command are transmitted according to the result of the preliminary determination.
In addition, when the special figure 2 start information is acquired (stored) during the non-occurrence of the big hit game state and the small hit game state and during the execution of the time reduction control, various lottery results are obtained based on the start information. Preliminary determination is executed, and the first look-ahead designation command, the second look-ahead designation command, and the third look-ahead designation command are transmitted according to the result of the preliminary determination.
It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is executed for all the acquired (stored) start information.

In the pre-determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot gaming state is occurring (hereinafter referred to as "first determination"). Here, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, is the special game phase (“state before opening the big winning opening”, “big winning opening open control state”) related to the big hit game state. , "Large winning opening closed valid state" or "Large winning opening opening end wait state"), it is determined that a big hit gaming state is occurring, and other special gaming phases are supported. If the value is, it is determined that the jackpot game state is not occurring.
If it is determined by the first determination that the jackpot gaming state is occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that the big hit gaming state is not occurring, it is further determined whether or not the small hit gaming state is occurring (hereinafter, referred to as "second determination"). Here, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is the special game phase related to the small hit game state (“pre-opening state of the character”, “control state of opening the character”, “ If it is a value corresponding to "the character closing effective state" or "the character opening end wait state"), it is determined that a small hit game state is occurring, and it is a value corresponding to another special game phase. In that case, it is determined that the small hit game state is not occurring.
If it is determined by the second determination that a small hit gaming state is occurring, the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that the small hit gaming state is not occurring, it is further determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed (hereinafter, referred to as "third determination"). Here, in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, if "1" is set, it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, the time saving control is executed. Judge that it is not inside.
When it is determined by the third determination that the time reduction control is not being executed, it is further determined whether or not the pre-determination start information stored in step S9-7 is the special figure 1 start information (hereinafter, "the third determination"). 4 Judgment ").
When it is determined by the fourth determination that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the lottery result pre-determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the pre-determination start information is not the special figure 1 start information (special figure 2 start information), the process is terminated and the next process (step S5-5 or step S5) is completed. -Move to 7).
On the other hand, when it is determined by the third determination that the time reduction control is being executed, it is further determined whether or not the pre-determination start information stored in step S9-7 is the special figure 2 start information (hereinafter,). , "Fifth judgment").
When it is determined by the fifth determination that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the lottery result pre-determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the fifth determination that the pre-determination start information is not the special figure 2 start information (it is the special figure 1 start information), the process is terminated and the next process (step S5-5 or step S5). -Move to 7).

Next, the lottery result pre-determination process will be described.
In the lottery result pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure winning determination process for determining the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit”, “small hit” or “missing”) is executed.
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol jackpot lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a special symbol jackpot lottery table in which the small hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered.
In the pre-special figure winning judgment process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is a "big hit" based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information and the special figure jackpot lottery table (preliminary). Jackpot judgment).
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". "(Winning) is judged.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot included in the pre-judgment start information is determined. Based on the random number and the special symbol small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit" (preliminary small hit determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment start information matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is displayed. Judged as "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment start information does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing". Judged as (lost).

In the lottery result pre-determination process, next, the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process for determining the type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol of the special symbol is executed.
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the type of jackpot symbol (“big hit 1 symbol” or “big hit 2 symbol”) is registered.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a small hit symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the type of the small hit symbol (“small hit 1 symbol” to “small hit 6 symbol”) is registered. There is.
In the pre-special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the pre-special symbol winning determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of the jackpot symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the advance special symbol winning determination determines "small hit" (winning), the type of the small hit symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the small hit symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determination start information and the small hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the advance special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the advance special symbol winning determination determines "missing" (lost), the "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopping symbol (stop symbol number).

In the lottery result pre-determination process, the first look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the first look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for designating the type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol stop symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the lottery result pre-determination process, next, the pre-special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the content of the variation pattern of the special symbol is executed.
In the pre-special figure fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information. Then, when it is determined that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the pre-special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-determination start information is not the special figure 1 start information (it is the special figure 2 start information), the pre-special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process is executed.

In the pre-special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a random number classification lottery table in which the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern random number classification is registered.
In addition, as a random number classification lottery table, a random number classification lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to the case where it is determined to be a winner ("big hit" or "small hit") by the preliminary special figure winning judgment, and a loss by the preliminary special drawing winning judgment ("" A random number classification lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where it is determined to be "missing") is stored.
Random number classification at the time of winning In the lottery table, only "fixed value" is registered as the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number. On the other hand, in the random number classification lottery table at the time of defeat, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are registered as the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number.
The "undefined value" means that the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is not determined when the start information (special figure 1 start information) is stored (acquired), and when the fluctuation display of the special symbol based on the start information is started. (At the time of execution of step S11-7), the fluctuation pattern in which the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the number of reservations at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the number of reservations in special figure 1) and the like. It is a random number classification.
The "fixed value" is the time when the start information (special figure 1 start information) is stored (step S9-8) regardless of the number of holdings at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (when the step S11-7 is executed). At the time of execution), it is a classification of fluctuation pattern random numbers in which the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the variation pattern random number is updated in the range of "0" to "1999". Then, in the random number classification lottery table at the time of winning, the values of all the fluctuation pattern random numbers from "0" to "1999" are "fixed values". On the other hand, in the random number classification lottery table at the time of defeat, the value of the fluctuation pattern random number in the range of "0" to "1700" is set as "indefinite value", and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number in the range of "1701" to "1999" is ". It is said to be a fixed value.

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, if it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information). Based on the fluctuation pattern random number and the random number classification lottery table at the time of winning, the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number is determined (in this case, it is determined as a "fixed value").
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated (“missing”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 starting information) and the random number classification lottery table at the time of defeat are displayed. Based on this, the classification of the variation pattern random number is determined.

In the preliminary special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the content of the first variation pattern is next determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is registered.
In addition, at the time of winning corresponding to the case where it is determined as a winning (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the preliminary special drawing winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later) as the special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table. Special Figure 1 First Fluctuation Pattern Lottery Table and Special Figure 1 First Fluctuation Pattern at the time of loss corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost (“missing”) by the preliminary special figure winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later). The lottery table and is stored.
Further, as the special figure 1 first variable pattern lottery table at the time of defeat, the special figure 1 first variable pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where the classification of the variable pattern random number is an indefinite value, and the classification of the variable pattern random number The special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where is a fixed value is stored.
Further, in the ROM 220, as the special figure 1 first variable pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat, the special figure 1 first variable pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to each holding number (the number of holdings in the special figure 1) is provided. It is stored.
Then, as the number of holdings increases, the type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) having a shorter fluctuation time is determined. The contents are set.

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, if it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information). The type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number and the first fluctuation pattern lottery table of the special figure 1 at the time of winning.
On the other hand, it was determined by the pre-special figure winning judgment that the selection was rejected (“missing”), and that the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) was “fixed value”. In the case, the type of the first variation pattern (special figure 1 first variation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat) based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information). Fluctuation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, it was determined by the pre-special figure winning judgment that the selection was rejected (“missing”), and that the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) was “indefinite value”. In this case, "variation pattern indefinite" is determined as the content of the first fluctuation pattern.

In the preliminary special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, the content of the second variation pattern is next determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern random number and the type (variation pattern number) of the second fluctuation pattern is registered.
In addition, at the time of winning corresponding to the case where it is determined as a winning (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the preliminary special drawing winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later) as the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table. Special figure 1 2nd variation pattern Lottery table and special figure 1 2nd variation pattern at the time of loss corresponding to the case where it is judged as a loss ("missing") by the preliminary special figure winning judgment (or the special figure winning judgment described later). The lottery table and is stored.
Further, as the special figure 1 second variable pattern lottery table at the time of defeat, the special figure 1 second variable pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where the classification of the variable pattern random number is an indefinite value, and the classification of the variable pattern random number The special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat corresponding to the case where is a fixed value is stored.
Further, the ROM 220 has a combination of a hold number (special figure 1 hold number) and a time saving control execution status (execution or stop) as a special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for indefinite value at the time of defeat. A special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to each is stored.
Then, as the number of holdings increases, the type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) having a shorter fluctuation time is determined. The contents are set.

Here, in the special drawing 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table at the time of winning, a type (variation pattern number) belonging to the "reach fluctuation pattern" is registered as the type of the second fluctuation pattern.
The “reach variation pattern” refers to a variation pattern in which a predetermined reach effect image is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 after the reach state is formed in the drum type display device 24.
In the "reach state", the same type of effect symbol (identification information) is displayed (stopped or temporarily stopped) at the predetermined stop position of the left drum 23a and the predetermined stop position of the right drum 23c, and the central drum 23b is rotated (the first). 2 It means a state in which the variable display of the staging pattern) continues.
On the other hand, in the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for indefinite value at the time of defeat, as the types of the second fluctuation pattern, the type belonging to the "normal fluctuation pattern" (variation pattern number) and the type belonging to the "reach fluctuation pattern" (Variation pattern number) and are registered.
On the other hand, only the type (variation pattern number) belonging to the "reach fluctuation pattern" is registered as the type of the second fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat ("normal fluctuation"). The type (variation pattern number) belonging to "Pattern" is not registered).

Then, in the pre-special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, if it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information). The type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number to be obtained and the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, it was determined by the pre-special figure winning judgment that the selection was rejected (“missing”), and that the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) was “fixed value”. In the case, the type of the second variation pattern (the second variation pattern type (special figure 1 start information) based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 second variation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat. Fluctuation pattern number) is determined.
On the other hand, it was determined by the pre-special figure winning judgment that the selection was rejected (“missing”), and that the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) was “indefinite value”. In this case, "variation pattern indefinite" is determined as the content of the second fluctuation pattern.

On the other hand, in the preliminary special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, first, the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is registered.
In addition, at the time of winning corresponding to the case where it is determined as a winning (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the preliminary special drawing winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later) as the special figure 2 first fluctuation pattern lottery table. Special Figure 2 First Fluctuation Pattern Lottery Table and Special Figure 2 First Fluctuation Pattern at the time of loss corresponding to the case where it is determined to be lost (“missing”) by the preliminary special figure winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later). The lottery table and is stored.
Then, in the pre-special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, if it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information). The type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number and the first fluctuation pattern lottery table of the special figure 2 at the time of winning.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated (“missing”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 first fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat Based on the lottery table, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.

In the preliminary special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing, next, the type (variation pattern number) of the second fluctuation pattern is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern is registered.
In addition, at the time of winning corresponding to the case where it is determined as a winning (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the preliminary special drawing winning judgment (or the special drawing winning judgment described later) as the special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern lottery table. Special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern Special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern at the time of loss corresponding to the case where the lottery table and the preliminary special figure winning judgment (or the special figure winning judgment described later) determine that the game is lost (“missing”). The lottery table and is stored.
Then, in the pre-special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process, if it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, it is included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information). The type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number to be obtained and the special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated (“missing”) by the pre-special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat Based on the lottery table, the type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.

Here, for all the types of the first fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is supported. It is attached.
In addition, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is associated with all the types of the second fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control. Has been done.
Further, in all the types of the first fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 2 first fluctuation pattern lottery table, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is associated.
Further, in all the types of the second fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern lottery table, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is associated.
In particular, all the types of the first fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control, and the special figure 2 registered in the first fluctuation pattern lottery table. In all the types of the first fluctuation pattern, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is associated with each other.
In addition, all the types of the second fluctuation pattern registered in the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control, and the special figure 2 registered in the second fluctuation pattern lottery table. In all the types of the second fluctuation pattern, the same (substantially the same) fluctuation time is associated with each other.

In the lottery result pre-determination process, next, the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are executed, the lottery result pre-determination process is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5 or step S5-7). do.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, the second look-ahead designation that specifies the content of the first fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern indefinite”) determined by the preliminary special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. A subcommand output of the RAM 230 is a command and a third look-ahead specification command that specifies the content of the second fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern indefinite”) determined by the preliminary special figure 1 variation pattern determination process. Store in the request buffer.
Alternatively, it was determined by the second look-ahead designation command that specifies the type of the first variation pattern (“variation pattern number”) determined by the advance special figure 2 variation pattern determination process, and by the advance special figure 2 variation pattern determination process. The third look-ahead designation command for specifying the type of the second fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern number”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Based on the above, when it is determined that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information is determined to be an "indefinite value", it is concrete. The second look-ahead designation command and the third look-ahead designation command for designating that the fluctuation pattern is undefined are transmitted to the staging control circuit 300 without determining the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 1 start information and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determination start information is determined to be a "fixed value", a specific case is specified. The type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined, and the second look-ahead designation command and the third look-ahead designation command for designating the determined variation pattern type (variation pattern number) are transmitted to the effect control circuit 300. To.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the pre-determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the specific type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined, and the type of the determined fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined. ) Is transmitted to the effect control circuit 300 as a second look-ahead designation command and a third look-ahead designation command.

Next, the special game management process of step S4-9 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a special game management process.
In this embodiment, the phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase") of the game (hereinafter referred to as "special game") executed based on the special symbol lottery is referred to as "special figure change waiting state". , "Special figure changing state", "Special figure stop symbol display state", "Large winning opening opening state", "Large winning opening opening control state", "Large winning opening closing enabled state", "Large winning opening opening end wait state", "character opening pre-opening state", "character opening control state", "character closing effective state", and "character opening end wait state" are stipulated. Has been done.
Then, in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to one of the 11 special game phases (special game phase flag) is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game.
Then, in the special game management process, the special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-9, first, as shown in FIG. 14, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special game phase) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, the special game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-10). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and the "special figure changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the special figure change processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special figure stop symbol display state", the special figure stop process described later is started. If it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening state", the large winning opening pre-opening process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening control state", it will be described later. When the large winning opening opening control process is started and the value corresponds to the "large winning opening closing valid state", the large winning opening closing effective processing described later is started and the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set. If it is a corresponding value, the large winning opening opening end wait process described later is started, and if it is a value corresponding to the "state before opening the accessory", the pre-opening process described later is started. If the value corresponds to the "accessory opening control state", the accessory opening control process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "accessory closing effective state", the accessory closing described later is performed. When the valid process is started and the value corresponds to the "character release end wait state", the character release end wait process described later is started.

Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "1" or more (No). Goes to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes), it goes to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more, and it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). In the case of moving to step S11-3 and determining that the value of the special figure 1 hold count counter is not "1" or more (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S10-4) is completed. ).
In step S11-3, the special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special figure hold number update process, the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure hold number update process, first, the start information (special figure 1 start) stored in the start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area and special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230 is used. The start information of one of the information and the special figure 2 start information) is selected as the determination start information.
In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is prioritized over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area, and the start determination is made. (Special figure winning judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) is executed.
Therefore, when the special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is acquired (stored) first. ) Is selected as the determination start information.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is acquired (stored) first. ) Is selected as the determination start information.
Next, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) is updated. At this time, if the determined determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly reserved for the special figure 1. Set to the number counter. On the other hand, when the determined determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added to the special figure 2 hold number. Set to the counter.

In step S11-4, the special figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the special figure winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special drawing winning determination).
In the special figure winning judgment process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit" based on the big hit random number included in the judgment start information and the special figure big hit lottery table (big hit judgment). do.
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "big hit". Judged as (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number included in the determination start information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, then the jackpot random number included in the determination start information is used. Based on the special symbol small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit" (small hit determination).
Specifically, when it is determined that the value of the big hit random number included in the judgment start information matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is ". It is judged as "small hit" (winning).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the big hit random number included in the judgment start information does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, the result of the special symbol lottery is "missing" ( It is judged as a loss).

In step S11-5, the special figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol stop symbol determination).
In the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the special symbol winning determination determines "big hit" (winning), the type of the big hit symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when the special symbol winning determination determines "small hit" (winning), the type of the small hit symbol is determined.
Specifically, the type of the small hit symbol (stop symbol number) is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the determination start information and the small hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the special symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, in the special symbol stop symbol determination process, the determined type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-6, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the symbol type specification command setting process, the symbol type specification command for specifying the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) determined in step S11-5 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-7, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined (special figure variation pattern determination).
In the special figure variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information.

Then, when it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, first, the classification of the variation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined to win (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) and the random number at the time of winning. The classification of the fluctuation pattern random number is determined based on the division lottery table (in this case, it is determined to be a "fixed value").
On the other hand, if it is determined to be rejected (“missing”) by the special figure winning judgment, it is based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) and the random number classification lottery table at the time of losing. , Fluctuation pattern Judge the classification of random numbers.
If it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, then the content of the first fluctuation pattern is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined to win (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) and the winning special FIG. 1 The type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined based on the first variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the special figure winning judgment that the selection is lost (“missing”), and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) is determined to be a “fixed value”. Is the type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat. ) Is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the special figure winning judgment that the selection is lost (“missing”), and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) is determined to be an “indefinite value”. Is based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 first fluctuation pattern lottery table for the indefinite value at the time of defeat corresponding to the current number of reservations in special figure 1. The type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
If it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, then the content of the second fluctuation pattern is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined to win (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) and the winning special FIG. 1 The type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern is determined based on the second variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the special figure winning judgment that the selection is lost (“missing”), and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) is determined to be a “fixed value”. Is the type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information) and the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for the fixed value at the time of defeat. ) Is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the special figure winning judgment that the selection is lost (“missing”), and the classification of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 1 starting information) is determined to be an “indefinite value”. Corresponds to the combination of the fluctuation pattern random number included in the determination start information (special figure 1 start information), the current special figure 1 hold number, and the current time saving control execution status (execution or stop). The type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for indefinite values at the time of defeat.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, first, the type of the first variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 2 starting information) and the winning special FIG. 2 The type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern is determined based on the first variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated (“missing”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 first fluctuation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat And, based on, the type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
If it is determined that the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, then the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
Specifically, when it is determined that the player has won (“big hit” or “small hit”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment starting information (special drawing 2 starting information) and the winning special FIG. 2 The type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern is determined based on the second variation pattern lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be defeated (“missing”) by the special figure winning judgment, the fluctuation pattern random number included in the judgment start information (special figure 2 start information) and the special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern lottery table at the time of defeat And, based on, the type of the second fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the type of the first fluctuation pattern is determined based on the special figure 1 start information, as a result of the special symbol lottery, the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is determined. The number of pending items is taken into consideration. Further, when determining the type of the second variation pattern based on the special figure 1 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery, the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, and the like are taken into consideration.
That is, when the first special symbol lottery is lost, the first change is made based on the table according to the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holdings, etc. The type of pattern is determined. In addition, when the first special symbol lottery is lost, the second change is based on the table according to the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holdings, etc. (special figure 1 second fluctuation pattern lottery table for indefinite value at the time of loss). The type of pattern is determined.
On the other hand, when determining the type of the first variation pattern based on the special figure 2 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery is taken into consideration, but the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, and the like are not taken into consideration. Further, when determining the type of the second variation pattern based on the special figure 2 start information, the result of the special symbol lottery is taken into consideration, but the execution status of the time saving control, the number of reservations, and the like are not taken into consideration.
That is, when the second special symbol lottery is won, the first variation is based on one table (the second special symbol lottery table at the time of winning) regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holdings, and the like. The type of pattern is determined. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is won, the second fluctuation is based on one table (special figure 2 at the time of winning, the second fluctuation pattern lottery table) regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holdings, and the like. The type of pattern is determined.
On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is lost, the first change is made based on one table (special figure 2 first change pattern lottery table at the time of loss) regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holds, etc. The type of pattern is determined. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is lost, the second change is based on one table (special figure 2 second change pattern lottery table at the time of loss) regardless of the execution status of the time saving control, the number of holds, etc. The type of pattern is determined.

In step S11-8, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the variation pattern command setting process, the first variation pattern specification command for specifying the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, the second variation pattern specification command for specifying the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern determined in step S11-7 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-9, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of one fluctuation pattern determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Further, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the second fluctuation pattern determined in step S11-7 is acquired. Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and fluctuation time 2 is calculated. Then, the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.
In step S11-10, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer.
Next, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 1 display device 61. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure display symbol counter corresponding to the special figure 2 display device 62. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-11, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. do.
At this time, when the determination start information is the special figure 1 start information, the hold number designation command for specifying that the special figure 1 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. When the determination start information is the special figure 2 start information, the hold number designation command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S11-12, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the process during special figure change executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 16, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S12-. When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is updated.
Specifically, in the special symbol variation display data update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the special symbol display symbol counter is newly set in the special symbol display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display devices 61 and 62 is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, when the variation display of the first special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special diagram 1 display device 61. do. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device 61, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the special symbol display symbol counter corresponding to the special diagram 2 display device 62. .. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device 62, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S12-5, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.

In step S12-6, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S12-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure stop symbol display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the processing during the stop of the special figure.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S13-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "big hit symbol"("big hit 1 symbol" or "big hit 2 symbol"), and it is determined that the stop symbol is a "big hit symbol" (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a “big hit symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
In step S13-3, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area and the time saving control end specification command is sent to the subcommand output request buffer. Store.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the state in which "0" is set in the time saving control flag area is maintained.

In step S13-4, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a first-class special electric service control table corresponding to each type of jackpot game state. Then, in each type 1 special electric service control table, the opening time, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the ending time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, each time Control data (solenoid control data, control time data), etc. corresponding to open / close switching are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the type 1 special electric service control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) is read, and the read type 1 special electric service control table is used as the special electric service control table of the RAM 230. Set in the area.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-5, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that specifies the type of the jackpot game state to be started (“big hit 1” or “big hit 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. Then, when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification flag area, "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
Next, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "small hit symbol" (one of "small hit 1 symbol" to "small hit 6 symbol"), and the stop symbol is a "small hit symbol". If it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a “small hit symbol” (No), the process proceeds to step S13-14.
In step S13-9, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the time saving control management process, the time saving control is managed.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the time reduction end determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S13-10).
In the time saving end determination process, first, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the first time saving counter is newly set as the value of the first time saving counter.
Next, when the stop display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the second time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the second time reduction counter. On the other hand, when the stop display of the first special symbol is terminated, the second time reduction counter is not updated.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first time reduction counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped), and the time saving control end specification command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time reduction counter is not "0", it is further determined whether or not the value of the second time reduction counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the second time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped), and the time saving control end specification command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is not "0" and the value of the second time saving counter is not "0", "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Maintain the state (maintain the state in which the time reduction control is executed).
In step S13-10, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the special electric accessory 54a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a type 2 special electric service control table corresponding to each type of small hit game state. Then, in each type 2 special electric service control table, the opening time, the bonus closing effective time, the bonus closing time, the ending time, the number of small hit games, and the bonus solenoid control data corresponding to each small hit game ( (Volume control data, control time data), V distribution solenoid control data (solor control data, control time data) corresponding to each small hit game, and the like are specified.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the type 2 special electric service control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) is read, and the read type 2 special electric service control table is controlled by the special electric service of the RAM 230. Set in the tablespace.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-11, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-12, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening designation command setting process, the opening designation command that specifies the type of the small hit game state to be started (one of "small hit 1" to "small hit 6") is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S13-13, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the accessory" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. Then, when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification flag area, "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
Next, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S13-14, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-15. In the time saving control management process, the time saving control is managed.
In the time saving control management process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, the time reduction end determination process described later is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S13-15).
In the time saving end determination process, first, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the first time saving counter is newly set as the value of the first time saving counter.
Next, when the stop display of the second special symbol is terminated, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the second time reduction counter is newly set as the value of the second time reduction counter. On the other hand, when the stop display of the first special symbol is terminated, the second time reduction counter is not updated.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the first time reduction counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the first time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped), and the time saving control end specification command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time reduction counter is not "0", it is further determined whether or not the value of the second time reduction counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the second time saving counter is "0", "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (the time saving control is stopped), and the time saving control end specification command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time reduction counter is not "0" and the value of the second time reduction counter is not "0", "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. Maintain the state (maintain the state in which the time reduction control is executed).
In the time saving control management process, next, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter, referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period, it is further determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as "second judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the flag area during the continuous chan period, "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period. Maintain the set state.
When it is determined by the second determination that "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0" (hereinafter). , "Third judgment").
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the set state.
When it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is "0", "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period of the RAM 230, and the continuous chan period end specification command is issued. , Subcommand Store in the output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is not "0"("1" or more), "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the state.

In step S13-15, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area, it is further determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as "second judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). do.
When it is determined by the second determination that "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0" (hereinafter). , "Third judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). do.
When it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is "0", "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
Next, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 18, first, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S14-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is referred to with reference to the type 1 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the number of times. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
Next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening open control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the special electric function opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric function open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S14-6) is completed. Or move to S16-4).
In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 53a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching count counter is set with reference to the type 1 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the corresponding solenoid control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the large winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is set with reference to the type 1 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the corresponding control time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is newly set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

Next, the large winning opening opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process.
When the large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, first, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S16-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric combination opening / closing switching number counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 19) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (7 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of is reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S16-5, the large winning opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 53a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing valid time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the large winning opening closing effective time setting process, the predetermined large winning opening closing effective time (interval time) is set with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set to the special game timer.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening closed valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening closing effective process.
When the large winning opening closure valid process is executed in step S10-3, first, as shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S17-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No). ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the first-class special electric service control table is set as a specified value. Acquire and judge.
In step S17-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the large winning opening closing time setting process, the predetermined large winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. ..
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command for specifying the type of the jackpot game state to be terminated (“big hit 1” or “big hit 2”) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the large winning opening opening end wait process.
When the large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S18-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S18-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, when the type of the jackpot game state to be terminated is "big hit 1" or "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot", the predetermined first time reduction The number of times (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the first time reduction counter. Further, a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the second time reduction counter. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is started. In addition, the time saving control start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when the type of the jackpot game state to be ended is "big hit 2", it is determined whether or not the "big hit 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time saving control. Then, when it is determined that the "big hit 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in this embodiment) is determined. Set to the first time reduction counter. Further, a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment) is set in the second time reduction counter. Further, "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is started. In addition, the time saving control start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the state in which "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. .. As a result, the time saving control is not started.
In the game state setting process, next, it is determined whether or not "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period of the RAM 230 (hereinafter, referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period, it is further determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as "second judgment").
When it is determined by the second determination that "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, and the continuous chan period start specification command is issued. Store in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the set state.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the flag area during the continuous change period, "0" is further set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. Is set or not (hereinafter referred to as "third judgment").
When it is determined by the third determination that "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0" (hereinafter). , "Fourth judgment").
On the other hand, when it is determined by the third determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the set state.
When it is determined by the fourth determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is "0", "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, and the continuous chan period end specification command is subordinated. Store in the command output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the fourth determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is not "0"("1" or more), "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the state.
In the game state setting process, next, a value corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0". (Hereinafter referred to as "second judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). ..
On the other hand, when it is determined by the second determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0", "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
Next, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release preprocessing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process for the accessory.
When the accessory release pre-processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 23, first, the process proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S42-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S42-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-3. In the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter is newly set in the special electric service continuous operation number counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S42-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S42-4, the accessory release control start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-5. In the accessory release control start process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 54a to the open state is set.
Specifically, in the accessory release control start processing, the special electric combination continuous operation number counter (small hit game) is referred to with reference to the type 2 special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230. The control time (5.0 [s] in this embodiment) corresponding to the value of) is read out. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
Further, the bonus solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter is read out with reference to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read accessory solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the accessory solenoid 66 based on the set accessory solenoid control data is started, and the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state in a predetermined pattern.
Further, referring to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the V distribution corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter (number of small hit games). Read the solenoid control data. Then, the read V distribution solenoid control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the V distribution solenoid 67 based on the set V distribution solenoid control data is started, and the distribution means is controlled to the V passing state or the non-V passing state in a predetermined pattern.
In step S42-5, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "role release control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the accessory opening control process.
When the accessory release control process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 24, first, the process proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S43-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3.
In step S43-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (7 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of is reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S43-3, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).

In step S43-3, the accessory release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-4. In the accessory release control end process, the accessory solenoid control data for designating the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the open state to the closed state.
Further, the V distribution solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state.
In step S43-4, the accessory closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-5. In the accessory closing effective time setting process, the predetermined accessory closing effective time (in the present embodiment, 3. 0 [s]) is set in the special game timer.
In step S43-5, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-6. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S43-6, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "feature closure enabled state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory closing effective processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effective closing of the accessory.
When the accessory closing effective process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 25, first, the process proceeds to step S44-1.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S44-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S44-5.
In step S44-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S44-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S44-6.
Here, with reference to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of small hit games specified in the type 2 special electric service control table is defined as a specified value. And make a judgment.

In step S44-3, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-4. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer with reference to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S44-4, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-5. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command for specifying the type of the small hit game state to be ended (one of "small hit 1" to "small hit 6") is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S44-5, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "role release end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S44-6, the accessory closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-7. In the accessory closing time setting process, a predetermined special winning opening closing time is set in the special game timer with reference to the type 2 special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S44-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the accessory" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the accessory release end wait process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the accessory release end wait process.
When the accessory release end wait process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, first, the process proceeds to step S45-1.
In step S45-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), step S45-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In step S45-2, various counter reset processes are executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-3. In various counter reset processes, an initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the winning ball counter for the winning combination.
In step S45-3, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and if it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area (Yes), it is determined. If it is determined in step S45-4 that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the V winning flag area (No), the process proceeds to step S45-9.
In step S45-4, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area and the time saving control end specification command is sent to the subcommand output request buffer. Store.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the state in which "0" is set in the time saving control flag area is maintained.

In step S45-5, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the special electric accessory 53a is set.
In the special electric service control data setting process, first, the type of the big hit game state to be started after the end of the small hit game state is selected.
At this time, if the type of the small hit game state to end is "small hit 1", "small hit 1 continuous big hit" is selected as the type of the big hit game state to start, and the type of the small hit game state to end. When is "small hit 2", select "small hit 2 continuous big hit" as the type of the starting big hit gaming state, and when the type of the ending small hit gaming state is "small hit 3". If "Small hit 3 continuous jackpot" is selected as the type of the starting jackpot game state and the type of the ending small hit gaming state is "Small hit 4", the type of the starting jackpot gaming state is "Small". If "Hit 4 continuous jackpot" is selected and the type of small hit game state to end is "Small hit 5", select "Small hit 5 continuous jackpot" as the type of jackpot game state to start and end. When the type of the small hit gaming state is "small hit 6", "small hit 6 continuous big hit" is selected as the type of the starting big hit gaming state.
Next, the first-class special electric service control table corresponding to the determined type of the jackpot gaming state is read out, and the read-out first-class special electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
Next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S45-6, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer with reference to the first-class special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S45-7, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-8. In the opening specification command setting process, the opening specification command that specifies the type of the jackpot game state to be started (one of "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot") is sent to the subcommand output request buffer. Store.
In step S45-8, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
Further, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S45-9, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special figure change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230 (hereinafter referred to as "first determination").
Then, when it is determined by the first determination that "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area, it is further determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as "second judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the first determination that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification flag area, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). do.
When it is determined by the second determination that "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0" (hereinafter). , "Third judgment").
On the other hand, if it is determined by the second determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4). do.
When it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is "0", "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, if it is determined by the third determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is not "0"("1" or more), the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-4).
In the special game phase update process, it is next determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag area of the RAM 230 during the continuous change period (hereinafter referred to as "fourth determination").
Then, when it is determined by the fourth determination that "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period, it is further determined whether or not "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. (Hereinafter referred to as "fifth judgment").
On the other hand, when it is determined by the fourth determination that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the flag area during the continuous chan period, "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period. Maintain the set state.
When it is determined by the fifth determination that "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230, it is further determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "0" (hereinafter). , "Sixth judgment").
On the other hand, when it is determined by the fifth determination that "0" is not set ("1" is set) in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230, "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the set state.
When it is determined by the sixth determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is "0", "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period of the RAM 230, and the continuous chan period end specification command is issued. , Subcommand Store in the output request buffer.
On the other hand, when it is determined by the sixth determination that the value of the special figure 2 hold count counter is not "0"("1" or more), "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous change period. Maintain the state.
Next, in the special game phase update process, the game state offset value is calculated based on the current game state. That is, the value of the time saving control flag area, the value of the V winning flag area, the value of the previous big hit symbol flag area, and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit are confirmed, and the game state offset corresponding to this confirmation result. Calculate the value. Then, the game state specification command for specifying the calculated game state offset value is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal game management process of step S4-10 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
Here, in the present embodiment, as a phase / stage (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game phase") of a game (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary game") executed based on the ordinary symbol lottery, "waiting for fluctuation of the ordinary figure". "State", "Public figure changing state", "Public figure stop symbol display state", "Public figure electric accessory opening pre-opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective state" Seven states are specified: "state" and "wait state for opening end of electric accessory".
Then, in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases (normal game phase flag) is set.
Further, the ROM 220 stores a normal game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the normal game.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and the process based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-10, first, as shown in FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.
In step S19-3, the normal game control module execution process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, when the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started, and the "normal map changing state" is started. If the value corresponds to, the process during normal map change described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal map stop symbol display state", the process during normal map stop described later is started. When the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening pre-opening state", the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory opening control state", the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory opening control state". , The ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory closing effective state", the ordinary electric accessory closing effective process described later is started and the "ordinary electric accessory closing effective state" is started. When the value corresponds to the "object release end wait state", the ordinary electric accessory release end wait process, which will be described later, is started.

Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal map fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal map fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). If it is determined in step S20-2 that the value of the normal figure hold count counter is not "1" or more (No), a series of processes are terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). do.
In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map hold number update process, the start information of one of the normal map start information stored in the normal map start information storage area of the RAM 230 is selected as the determination start information.
In the present embodiment, among the normal map start information stored in the normal map start information storage area, the earliest acquired (stored) normal map start information is selected as the determination start information.

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is judged (normal figure winning judgment).
In the ROM 220, a normal figure winning lottery table in which the winning price of the ordinary symbol lottery is registered is stored.
Then, in the normal figure winning determination process, the normal figure winning determination is executed based on the winning random number included in the determination start information and the normal figure winning lottery table.
Specifically, when the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information matches the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the determination start information does not match the winning value, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (lost).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol stop symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when it is determined as "win" (winning) by the normal symbol winning judgment, "normal symbol per symbol" is used as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number). judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, the type (variation pattern number) of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined (normal map fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped, the first type (2.0 in this embodiment) is used as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). The type corresponding to the fluctuation time of [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed, the second type (in the present embodiment, the type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is used as the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern. To judge.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the normal map changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal map display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21-. When the process proceeds to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device 60 is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation display data update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value of the normal map display symbol counter is newly set in the normal map display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device 60 is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, a value corresponding to the acquired stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is set in the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device 60, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process of stopping the normal drawing.
When the normal-figure stopped process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol per symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol per symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. Then, if it is determined that the stopped symbol is a “normal symbol” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening / closing of the ordinary electric accessory 52a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, in each normal electric service control table, the time before the normal electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control data corresponding to each opening / closing switching (solenoid control data, control time). Data) etc. are specified.
In the normal electric service control data setting process, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read normal electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of open / close switching is read with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service pre-opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory before opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 31, first, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the normal electric function opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 32, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S23-3) is completed. Or move to S25-4).
In step S24-2, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 52a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the start port solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the normal electric accessory 52a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching number counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service open / close switching count counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is newly set in the normal electric service open / close switch count counter.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 33, first, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switch count counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process (see FIG. 32) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of is reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the power stop is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 52a is controlled to be in the closed state.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service closing effective time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an ordinary electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, first, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the opening end wait time setting process, a predetermined opening end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the normal electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, first, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-11). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

Next, the launch position designation management process executed in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a launch position designation management process.
When the launch position designation management process is executed in step S4-14, first, as shown in FIG. 36, the process proceeds to step S46-1.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230, and it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area (Yes). In), the process proceeds to step S46-2, and when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification start flag area (No), step S46- Move to 4.
In step S46-2, the right-handed notification start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-3. In the right-handed notification start process, the launch position display of the status display device 63 starts a display (hereinafter referred to as “right-handed notification display”) for designating (notifying) the launch of the game ball to the right path 30b.
Further, "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the right-handed notification start flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S46-3, the right-handed notification start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-4. In the right-handed notification start designation command setting process, the right-handed notification start designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S46-4, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230, and it is determined that "1" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area (Yes). In), the process proceeds to step S46-5, and when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the right-handed notification end flag area (No), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S46-5, the right-handed notification end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-6. In the right-handed notification end process, the right-handed notification display is terminated on the launch position display of the status display device 63, and a display for designating (notifying) the launch of the game ball to the left side path 30a (hereinafter, "left-handed notification display"). ”) Is started.
Further, "0" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM 230. Further, "0" is set in the right-handed notification end flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S46-6, the right-handed notification end designation command setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the right-handed notification end specification command setting process, the right-handed notification end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing executed by the staging control circuit 300)
Next, the staging control process executed by the CPU of the staging control circuit 300 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 repeatedly executes the main loop process (not shown) after executing the CPU initialization process (not shown). Here, "0" is set in each flag area such as the flag area during the continuous change period and the flag area during the time reduction control of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 by the CPU initialization process.
Further, the frequency generation circuit (not shown) of the effect control circuit 300 generates a timer interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment). Then, the CPU of the effect control circuit 300 starts the effect control process shown in FIG. 37 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the timer interrupt request signal.
When the effect control process is started, the process proceeds to step S32-1.
In step S32-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during the execution of the main loop process is saved in the RAM save area.

In step S32-2, the effect flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3. In the effect flag setting process, various effect flags are set.
In the effect flag setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving control start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the time reduction control start designation command has been received, "1" is set in the time reduction control in-progress flag area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300.
In the effect flag setting process, it is next to determine whether or not the time saving control end specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the time reduction control end designation command has been received, "0" is set in the time reduction control in-progress flag area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300.
Next, in the effect flag setting process, it is determined whether or not the continuous-chan period start designation command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the continuous chan period start designation command has been received, "1" is set in the continuous chan period flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Next, in the effect flag setting process, it is determined whether or not the continuous-chan period end specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the command for specifying the end of the continuous chan period has been received, "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S32-3, the hold effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. In the hold effect management process, a hold effect is set.
Specifically, in the hold effect management process, first, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command for designating that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" has been received.
Then, when it is determined that the command for specifying the number of holdings for designating that the number of holdings for special figure 1 has increased by "1" has been received, "1" is added to the value of the number of holdings for special figure 1. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, a process for starting the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 1 start information is executed.
Next, in the hold effect management process, it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of holds, which specifies that the number of holds in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1", has been received.
Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number designation command for designating that the hold number has increased by "1" has been received, "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, a process for starting the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the newly acquired special figure 2 start information is executed.
Next, in the hold effect management process, it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of holds, which specifies that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 has decreased by "1", has been received.
Then, when it is determined that the command for specifying the number of holdings for designating that the number of holdings for special figure 1 has decreased by "1" has been received, "1" is subtracted from the value of the number of holdings for special figure 1. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 start information for which the notification display of the special symbol is started is terminated, and the reserved symbol display area b1 is reserved corresponding to the start information. The process for starting the display of the symbol h is executed.
Next, in the hold effect management process, it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of holds, which specifies that the number of holds in Special Figure 2 has decreased by "1", has been received.
Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number designation command for specifying that the hold number has decreased by "1" has been received, "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter. Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 start information for which the notification display of the special symbol is started is terminated, and the reserved symbol display area b1 is reserved corresponding to the start information. The process for starting the display of the symbol h is executed.

In step S32-4, the pre-judgment information storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. In the pre-judgment information saving process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM as hold information.
Specifically, in the pre-determination information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead designation command (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) has been received.
Then, when it is determined that all the look-ahead designation commands (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) have been received, the hold information storage process is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, a hold information storage area capable of storing hold information is set. Further, as the reserved information storage area, the first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 start information storage area of RAM 230) and the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 start information storage area of RAM 230) are used. ) Corresponds to the second reserved information storage area.
In the first reserved information storage area, it is possible to store reserved information up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the first reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area is stored. That is, each hold information stored in the first hold information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area.
In the second reserved information storage area, it is possible to store reserved information up to a predetermined number (four in this embodiment). In the second reserved information storage area, the reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is stored. That is, each hold information stored in the second hold information storage area corresponds to each special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area.
Each hold information includes symbol information indicating the type of the stopped symbol, first variation information indicating the content of the first variation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “variation pattern indefinite”), and content of the second variation pattern (““ variation pattern number ”). It includes a second variation information indicating "variation pattern number" or "variation pattern indefinite").

In the hold information storage process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit p symbol”). Or "small hit q symbol"), the content of the first fluctuation pattern specified by the second look-ahead designation command ("variation pattern indefinite" or "variation pattern m"), and the second specified by the third look-ahead designation command. The content of the variation pattern (“variation pattern indefinite” or “variation pattern n”) is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of the analyzed stop symbol and the first variation pattern corresponding to the content of the analyzed first variation pattern are analyzed. Hold information including the fluctuation information and the second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed second fluctuation pattern is generated. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the first hold information storage area.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit p symbol”). Or "small hit q symbol"), the content of the first fluctuation pattern specified by the second look-ahead designation command ("variation pattern m"), and the content of the second fluctuation pattern specified by the third look-ahead designation command ("" Fluctuation pattern n ”), the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed, the first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed first fluctuation pattern, and the content of the analyzed second fluctuation pattern. Second variation information corresponding to, and pending information including. Then, the generated hold information is stored (stored) in the second hold information storage area.

In step S32-5, the variation staging management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable staging management process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop staging management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop staging management process will be described later.
In step S32-7, the small hit effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8. The small hit effect management process will be described later.
In step S32-8, the jackpot effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-9. The jackpot production management process will be described later.
In step S32-9, the V winning effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-10. The V prize production management process will be described later.
In step S32-10, the additional effect management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-11. The additional staging management process will be described later.
In step S32-11, the launch position display management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-12. The launch position display management process will be described later.
In step S32-12, a register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S32-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address specified by the stack pointer).

Next, the variable staging management process executed in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the variation effect management process.
When the variation effect management process is executed in step S32-5, first, as shown in FIG. 38, the process proceeds to step S33-1.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command means a symbol type designation command, a first fluctuation pattern designation command, and a second fluctuation pattern designation command.
Whether or not a predetermined control command is received depends on whether or not the symbol type specification command, the first variation pattern specification command, and the second variation pattern specification command are stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Judgment based on.

In step S33-2, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous chan period, and if it is determined that it is not in the continuous chan period (No), the process proceeds to step S33-3 and it is determined that the continuous chan period is in progress. If yes, the process proceeds to step S33-6.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a "continuous chan period" is defined as a gaming period in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player.
In the present embodiment, during the continuous change period, the time saving control is being executed, the jackpot gaming state is occurring, and the notification display (variable display or stop display) based on the special figure 2 start information is being executed. Of the above, it is a period that satisfies at least one condition.
Specifically, during the continuous Chan period, when the "big hit 1" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the jackpot gaming state ends (start of the time saving control). It will be started. The continuous Chan period continues as long as the time reduction control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring. Then, during the continuous change period, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the special figure 2 start information storage area If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the special figure 2 start information (the special figure 2 hold number is "0"), it is terminated according to the end of the time reduction control, while the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or the first time reduction counter or the first time reduction counter). When the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the 2 time reduction counter) becoming "0", "1" or more of the special figure 2 start information is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. (When the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is "1" or more), the start determination of the special figure 2 is executed at the end of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. It is terminated according to the end of the small hit game state generated by the termination of the notification display (variation display and stop display) based on the information.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period during the continuous chan period.
Therefore, in step S33-2, when "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined that the flag area is not in the continuous chan period, and "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period. If so, it is determined that it is in the continuous Chan period.

In step S33-3, the notification effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-4. In the notification effect lottery process, the mode of the variable effect (variable effect number) and the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) are determined.
In the notification effect lottery process, first, the stop effect (the mode (stop effect number) of the first effect symbol to the fourth effect symbol to be stopped and displayed) is determined.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a stop effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the stop effect lottery random number and the mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is registered is stored. Further, as the stop effect lottery table, a stop effect lottery table corresponding to each type of stop symbol (each stop symbol number) is stored.
When determining the mode of the stop staging, first, a stop staging lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the stop effect lottery table corresponding to the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command is read. Then, the mode (stop effect number) of the stop effect is determined based on the acquired stop effect lottery random number and the stop effect lottery table.
Further, the determined mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In the notification effect lottery process, next, the mode of the variable effect (variable effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores the first variable effect lottery table during the normal period in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the mode (variable effect number) of the first variable effect is registered. .. Further, as the first variation effect lottery table during the normal period, the first variation effect lottery table corresponding to each type of the first variation pattern (each variation pattern number) is stored during the normal period.
Further, in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, the second variable effect lottery table is stored during the normal period in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the mode (variable effect number) of the second variable effect is registered. ing. Further, as the second variation effect lottery table during the normal period, the second variation effect lottery table corresponding to each type of the second variation pattern (each variation pattern number) is stored during the normal period.
In the present embodiment, as a variable effect during the normal period, whether or not the first effect symbol to the third effect symbol are stopped and displayed by the "big hit symbol" on the drum type display device 24 is displayed from each drum 24a to An effect that is agitated by the operation of 24c (hereinafter referred to as "variable effect during a normal period") is executed.
The "normal period" means a period excluding the period of consecutive chans.
The mode (variation pattern number) related to the variation effect during the normal period is registered in the first variation effect lottery table during each normal period and the second variation effect lottery table during each normal period.

When determining the mode of the variation effect, first, the variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the first variation effect lottery table corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the first variation pattern designated by the first variation pattern designation command is read out during the normal period. Then, the mode (variable effect number) of the first variable effect is determined based on the acquired variable effect lottery random number and the first variable effect lottery table during the normal period.
Next, the second variation effect lottery table corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the second variation pattern designated by the second variation pattern designation command is read out during the normal period. Then, the mode (variable effect number) of the second variable effect is determined based on the acquired variable effect lottery random number and the second variable effect lottery table during the normal period.

In step S33-4, the advance notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-5. In the advance notice effect lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, and if it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the mode of the advance notice effect is determined.
The "notice effect" is an effect executed during the variable display of the effect symbols (1st effect symbol to 4th effect symbol), and is the result of a special symbol lottery related to the variable display ("missing" or "big hit". ") Is a production that suggests (notices).
The ROM of the staging control circuit 300 stores a staging lottery table in which the winning price of the staging lottery is registered. Further, as the notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each type of stop symbol (each stop symbol number) is stored.
Further, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a advance notice effect mode lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the advance notice effect lottery random number and the mode of the advance notice effect (notice effect number) is registered.
In the advance notice effect lottery process, first, it is decided whether or not to execute the advance notice effect.
To do this, first, a notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command is read. Then, based on the acquired value of the advance notice effect lottery random number and the advance notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice effect.
When it is decided to execute the preview effect, next, the mode (preliminary effect number) of the advance notice effect is determined based on the acquired value of the advance notice effect lottery random number and the advance notice effect mode lottery table. ..

In step S33-5, the normal time variation effect start process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the normal time variation effect start process, the variation effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an effect control table corresponding to various effects. Then, as the staging control table, the staging control table corresponding to each variable staging number, the staging control table corresponding to each advance notice staging number, the staging control table corresponding to each stop staging number, and each small hit staging number are supported. A staging control table to be performed, a staging control table corresponding to each jackpot staging number, a staging control table corresponding to a V winning staging, a staging control table corresponding to each ending staging number, and a staging corresponding to each initial notification staging number. A control table and an effect control table corresponding to each additional effect number are stored.
Various effects (display of the effect image on the image display device 23, driving of the drums 24a to 24c on the drum type display device 24, output of the effect sound by the sound generator 22, lighting of the lamps 20 and 21) are displayed on each effect control table. Etc.) Information that regulates the progress is registered.

In the normal time variation effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode of the first variation effect (variation effect number) determined in step S33-3 and the mode of the second variation effect determined in step S33-3 (the mode of the second variation effect). Read the effect control table corresponding to the variable effect number).
Further, when it is decided in step S33-4 to execute the advance notice effect, the effect control table corresponding to the determined form of the advance notice effect (notice effect number) is read out.
Then, the effect control table related to the first variation effect and the effect control table related to the second variation effect are combined to generate the effect control table related to the variation effect. At this time, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the effect control table related to the first variable effect, the effect control table related to the second variable effect, and the effect control table related to the advance notice effect are combined. Then, an effect control table related to the variable effect is generated.
Further, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the variable effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7 and the continuous battle effect is performed. If it is determined that is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-8.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a battle effect is executed as a notification effect (variable effect and stop effect) and a small hit effect during the continuous chan period.
In the "battle effect", the effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character compete against each other is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, and the result of the special symbol lottery is suggested (notified) by the content of the effect image. ..
In this embodiment, one-shot battle production and continuous battle production are set as the types of battle production.
"Single-shot battle production" is a type of battle production in which the production content (story) is completed by each notification production (variable production, stop production, and small hit production).
In the one-shot battle effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) by the content of the one-shot battle effect (content of the effect image).
Specifically, in the one-shot battle production, when a specific role is won by a special symbol lottery, a production image in which the ally character wins is displayed. On the other hand, in the one-shot battle production, if the specific role is not won by the special symbol lottery, the production image in which the ally character is defeated is displayed.
The "specific combination" refers to a winning type in which a jackpot game state in which time reduction control is started can occur. In the present embodiment, the specific combination means "V winning small hit", "big hit 1" or "big hit 2".
Therefore, "when a specific role is won" means a case where "V winning small hit", "big hit 1" or "big hit 2" is won.
On the other hand, "when the specific role is not won" means the case where the "V winning impossible small hit" is won or the case is "missing" (lost).
"V winning small hit" is a type of small hit that allows the game ball to pass through the V region (easily) while the small hit game state is occurring, and in particular, a big hit game state in which time reduction control is started occurs. The type of small hit that can be made. In the present embodiment, "V winning small hit" means "small hit 1" to "small hit 3".
"V winning impossible small hit" is a type of small hit that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the small hit game state, in particular, the big hit game state in which the time saving control is started. Is a type of small hit that cannot occur. In the present embodiment, "V winning impossible small hit" means "small hit 4" to "small hit 6".

The "continuous battle effect" is a type of battle effect in which the effect content (story) can be continuous over a predetermined number of notification effects (variable effect, stop effect, and small hit effect). The continuous battle effect is configured to include a maximum number of notification effects (3 [times] in this embodiment). Then, in the continuous battle production, an individual battle production is executed as a notification production for each time.
In the continuous battle effect, the result of the special symbol lottery (start determination) is suggested (notified) by the content of each individual battle effect (notification effect of each time).
Specifically, in each individual battle production, when a specific role is won by a special symbol lottery, a production image with contents that the ally character is advantageous is displayed. On the other hand, in each individual battle production, if the specific role is not won by the special symbol lottery, the production image with the content that the ally character is disadvantageous is displayed.
During the execution of the continuous battle effect, "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Then, in step S33-6, when "1" is set in the flag area during continuous battle effect, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and "0" is set in the flag area during continuous battle effect. If it is set, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed.

In step S33-7, the individual battle effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the individual battle effect start process, the individual battle effect (variable effect) is started.
In the individual battle production start process, first, the value of the individual battle count counter is confirmed. Further, with reference to the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13, the variable effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read out. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the read variable effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the individual battle effect (variable effect) based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S33-8, the one-shot battle effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-9. In the single-shot battle production lottery process, the mode (variable production number) of the single-shot battle production is determined.
In the one-shot battle production lottery process, first, the type of enemy character to be the opponent in the one-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, six types of "enemy character A" to "enemy character F" are set as the types of enemy characters.
The ROM of the production control circuit 300 stores an enemy character lottery table in which the value of the enemy character lottery random number and the type of the enemy character (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) and the correspondence are registered. There is.
Further, as the enemy character lottery table, a winning enemy character lottery table corresponding to the case where a specific role is won and a losing enemy character lottery table corresponding to the case where the specific role is not won are stored.
In addition, as an enemy character lottery table at the time of winning, each combination of the types of ally characters ("Friend character A" to "Friend character C") described later and the number of round games that can be executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. The enemy character lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to is stored.
Further, as the defeated enemy character lottery table, the defeated enemy character lottery table corresponding to each type of ally character (“friendly character A” to “friendly character C”) is stored.
Then, in the one-shot battle production, the expected value of winning a specific role by the combination of the type of the ally character selected in advance and the type of the enemy character determined as the opponent (hereinafter referred to as "competition combination"). It is suggested that the number of round games that can be executed when a specific combination is won.
The "expected value" refers to the degree of possibility of winning a specific role when the battle combination is determined (displayed).

When determining the type of enemy character, first, an enemy character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not a specific combination has been won based on the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command.
Then, when it is determined that the specific combination has been won, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the specific combination specified by the symbol type specification command. Check the number of round games corresponding to, and read out the enemy character lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to the confirmation result. Then, the type of the enemy character is determined based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the enemy character lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific combination has not been won, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is confirmed, and the confirmation result is dealt with. Read the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat. Then, the type of the enemy character is determined based on the acquired enemy character lottery random number and the enemy character lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the one-shot battle production lottery process, next, the type of appearance pattern of the enemy character in the one-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, as appearance patterns corresponding to each type of enemy character (each of "enemy character A" to "enemy character F"), a plurality of types of appearance patterns having different expected values for winning a specific role are set. There is.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores an appearance pattern lottery table in which the correspondence between the appearance pattern lottery random number value and the appearance pattern type is registered.
Further, as the appearance pattern lottery table, a winning pattern lottery table corresponding to the case where a specific combination is won and a defeated appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to the case where the specific combination is not won are stored.
Further, as a winning pattern lottery table, a winning pattern lottery table corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored.
In addition, as a defeated appearance pattern lottery table, a defeated appearance pattern lottery table corresponding to each type of enemy character is stored.

When determining the type of appearance pattern of an enemy character, first, the appearance pattern lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not a specific combination has been won based on the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command.
Then, when it is determined that the specific role has been won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the winning pattern lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the type of appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the specific role has not been won, the type of the determined enemy character is confirmed, and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the type of appearance pattern is determined based on the acquired appearance pattern lottery random number and the appearance pattern lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the one-shot battle production lottery process, next, the type of the special move of the ally character in the one-shot battle production is determined.
In this embodiment, as special moves corresponding to each type of ally character (each of "ally character A" to "ally character C"), a plurality of types of special moves having different expected values for winning a specific role are set. There is.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a special move lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the special move lottery random number and the type of the special move is registered.
Further, as the special move lottery table, a winning special move lottery table corresponding to the case where a specific role is won and a defeated special move lottery table corresponding to the case where the specific role is not won are stored.
Further, as the winning special move lottery table, the winning special move lottery table corresponding to each match combination is stored.
In addition, as a special move lottery table at the time of defeat, a special move lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to each match combination is stored.

When determining the type of special move of an ally character, first, a special move lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not a specific combination has been won based on the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command.
Then, when it is determined that the specific combination has been won, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the type of the determined enemy character, and the type of the determined enemy character. Is confirmed, and the special move lottery table at the time of winning corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the type of the special move is determined based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of winning.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specific combination has not been won, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the type of the determined enemy character. And, and read out the special move lottery table at the time of defeat corresponding to the confirmation result. Then, the type of the special move is determined based on the acquired special move lottery random number and the special move lottery table at the time of defeat.

In the one-shot battle effect lottery process, next, the mode of the variable effect (variable effect number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a one-shot battle first variable effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the mode (variable effect number) of the first variable effect is registered.
In addition, as the one-shot battle first variation production lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of the first variation pattern type (variation pattern number), the ally character type, the enemy character type, and the appearance pattern type. The one-shot battle first variable production lottery table is stored.
Then, in each single-shot battle first variable production lottery table, the single-shot corresponding to the combination of the type of the ally character corresponding to the single-shot battle first variable production lottery table, the type of the enemy character, and the type of the appearance pattern. The variable production number related to the battle production is registered.
Further, in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a single-shot battle second variable effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the variable effect lottery random number and the mode of the second variable effect (variable effect number) is registered is stored. There is.
In addition, as a single-shot battle second variation production lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number), the type of the ally character, the type of the enemy character, and the type of the special move. The one-shot battle second variable production lottery table is stored.
Then, in each single-shot battle second variable production lottery table, the single-shot corresponding to the combination of the type of the ally character corresponding to the single-shot battle second variable production lottery table, the type of the enemy character, and the type of the special move. The variable production number related to the battle production is registered.

When determining the mode of the variation effect, first, the variation effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the first fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) specified by the first fluctuation pattern designation command and the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. , The determined type of enemy character and the determined type of appearance pattern are confirmed, and the single-shot battle first variable production lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the mode (variable effect number) of the first variable effect is determined based on the acquired variable effect lottery random number and the single-shot battle first variable effect lottery table.
Next, the type of the second variation pattern (variation pattern number) specified by the second variation pattern designation command and the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. , The determined type of enemy character and the determined type of special move are confirmed, and the single-shot battle second variable production lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the mode (variable effect number) of the second variable effect is determined based on the acquired variable effect lottery random number and the single-shot battle second variable effect lottery table.

In the single-shot battle effect lottery process, next, the mode (stop effect number) of the stop effect related to the single-shot battle effect is determined.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, the correspondence between the mode of the second variable effect related to the single-shot battle effect (variable effect number) and the mode of the stop effect related to the single-shot battle effect (stop effect number) is registered. The battle stop effect selection table is stored.
When determining the mode of the stop effect related to the one-shot battle effect, the single-shot battle stop effect selection table is read out. Then, based on the determined mode of the second variable effect related to the single-shot battle effect (variable effect number) and the single-shot battle stop effect mode selection table, the mode of the stop effect related to the single-shot battle effect (stop effect number). To decide.
Further, the determined mode of the stop effect (stop effect number) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S33-9, it is determined whether or not the "V winning impossible small hit" is won, and if it is determined that the "V winning impossible small hit" is won (Yes), step S33-10 is performed. If it is determined that the "V winning impossible small hit" has not been won (No), the process proceeds to step S33-12.
Here, whether or not the "V winning impossible small hit" is won is determined based on the type of the stop symbol (stop symbol number) specified by the symbol type designation command.

In step S33-10, the small hit effect lottery process at the time of losing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-11. Small hit effect at the time of defeat In the lottery process, the type of small hit effect (small hit effect at the time of defeat) related to the one-shot battle effect is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "V winning impossible small hit" is won, the small hit effect at the time of losing is executed as the small hit effect executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state.
The small hit effect at the time of defeat is an effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the start information stored in the start information storage area.
Specifically, in the small hit effect at the time of defeat, whether or not the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won. It is a production that suggests.
In the present embodiment, as a type of small hit effect at the time of defeat, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won. A plurality of small hit production types at the time of losing are set with different expected values for being present.
Further, in the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a small hit effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the small hit effect lottery random number and the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is registered is stored. Has been done. Then, in each lottery table for the small hit effect at the time of the defeat, the small hit effect number related to the small hit effect at the time of the defeat is registered.
In addition, when the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area as a small hit effect lottery table at the time of defeat includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that a specific combination has been won. The corresponding special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area and the small hit effect lottery table at the time of the first defeat does not include the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won. A small hit production lottery table at the time of the second defeat corresponding to the case is stored.

In the small hit effect lottery process at the time of losing, first, the small hit effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, whether or not the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) includes the hold information that specifies that the specific combination has been won. Is determined.
Then, it is said that the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) includes the hold information for designating that the specific combination has been won. If it is determined, the small hit effect lottery table at the time of the first defeat is read out. Then, the mode (small hit effect number) of the small hit effect at the time of the defeat is determined based on the acquired small hit effect lottery random number and the small hit effect lottery table at the time of the first defeat.
On the other hand, if the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) does not include the hold information that specifies that the specific combination has been won. If it is determined, the small hit effect lottery table at the time of the second defeat is read out. Then, the mode (small hit effect number) of the small hit effect at the time of the defeat is determined based on the acquired small hit effect lottery random number and the small hit effect lottery table at the time of the second defeat.

In step S33-11, the small hit effect setting process at the time of losing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-12. In the losing small hit effect setting process, the mode (small hit effect number) of the losing small hit effect determined in step S33-10 is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S33-12, the single-shot battle effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the single-shot battle production start process, the single-shot battle production (variable production) is started.
In the single-shot battle effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (variable effect number) of the first variable effect related to the single-shot battle effect determined in step S33-8 and the single-shot battle effect determined in step S33-8. The effect control table corresponding to the mode (variation effect number) of the second variation effect according to the above is read out. Further, the effect control table related to the first variation effect and the effect control table related to the second variation effect are combined to generate the effect control table related to the variation effect.
Then, the generated effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, a one-shot battle effect (variable effect) based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the stop effect management process executed in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the stop effect management process.
When the stop effect management process is executed in step S32-6, first, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S34-1.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
Here, whether or not the stop designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the stop designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S34-2, the stop staging start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, the stop effect is started.
Specifically, in the stop effect start process, it is first determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and "0" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production. It is determined that the continuous battle production is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle count counter is confirmed. Further, with reference to the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13, the stop effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle count counter is read out. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the read stop effect number is read. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the stop effect based on the set effect control table is started.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (stop effect number) of the stop symbol set in step S33-3 or step S33-8 is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the stop effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the small hit effect management process executed in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a small hit effect management process. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a preliminary determination result pattern.
When the small hit effect management process is executed in step S32-7, first, as shown in FIG. 40, the process proceeds to step S35-1.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
Here, whether or not the opening designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300.
In step S35-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command specifies "small hit"("small hit 1" to "small hit 6"), and the opening designation command specifies "small hit". If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-3, and if it is determined that the opening specification command does not specify "small hit" (No), a series of processes are terminated and the next step is performed. (Step S32-8).

In step S35-3, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous chan period, and if it is determined that it is not in the continuous chan period (No), the process proceeds to step S35-4 and it is determined that the continuous chan period is in progress. If yes, the process proceeds to step S35-5.
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined that the flag area is not in the continuous chan period, and if "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined. Judge that it is in the continuous Chan period.
In step S35-4, the normal time small hit effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the normal small hit effect start process, the small hit effect is started.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, a normal time small hit effect selection table in which the correspondence between each type of "small hit" and the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is registered is stored.
In the normal small hit effect start process, first, the type of "small hit" specified by the opening specification command is confirmed. In addition, the small hit effect selection table is read out during normal times. Then, the mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) is determined based on the confirmed type of "small hit" and the normal time small hit effect selection table.
Further, the effect control table corresponding to the determined mode of the small hit effect (stop effect number) is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.
In step S35-5, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command specifies "V winning small hit"("small hit 1" to "small hit 3"), and the opening designation command is "V winning small hit". If it is determined that "hit" is not specified (No), the process proceeds to step S35-6, and if it is determined that the opening specification command specifies "V winning small hit" (Yes). , Step S35-7.

In step S35-6, the small hit effect start process at the time of losing is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the small hit production start process at the time of defeat, the small hit production is started.
In the small hit effect start process at the time of defeat, it is first determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and "0" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production. It is determined that the continuous battle production is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle count counter is confirmed. Further, with reference to the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13, the small hit effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read out. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the read small hit effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, "1" is subtracted from the value of the individual battle count counter. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the individual battle count counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle count counter is "0", "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous battle production. This ends the continuous battle production. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the individual battle count counter is not "0"("1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production is maintained. As a result, continuous battle production is continued.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (small hit effect number) of the small hit effect at the time of defeat set in step S33-11 is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S35-7, the round number suggestion effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-8. In the round number suggestion effect lottery process, the mode of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "V winning small hit" is won during the consecutive chan period and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the number of rounds. Suggestion production is executed.
The "round number suggestion effect" is the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state generated in response to the V prize (a prize ball that can be acquired by the player during the occurrence of the jackpot game state). It is a production that suggests the number).
In the present embodiment, as the mode of the round number suggestion effect, a mode without addition and a mode with addition are set.

The mode without addition is a mode of a round number suggestion effect composed of only the initial notification effect.
The mode with addition is a mode of a round number suggestion effect composed of an initial notification effect and an addition effect of 1 [times] or more.
In the round number suggestion effect, the acquired round number suggestion icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23. Then, in the round number suggestion effect, the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state is suggested by the number of acquired round number suggestion icons displayed on the display screen 23a.

Specifically, in the non-addition mode, the number of the winning round number suggestion icons finally displayed in the initial notification effect matches the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small hit".
That is, if the same number of winning rounds suggestion icons as the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small hit" is displayed at the start of the initial notification effect, the winning rounds displayed thereafter are displayed. The number of number suggestion icons is not increased.
On the other hand, if the number of acquired rounds suggestion icon is displayed less than the number of round games corresponding to the type of "small hit" won at the start of the initial notification effect, by the end of the initial notification effect, The number of displayed rounds suggestion icons is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the type of "small hit" won.
On the other hand, in the additional mode, in the initial notification effect, the number of acquired rounds suggestion icon is displayed, which is smaller than the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small hit".
After that, an icon suggesting the number of acquired rounds of 1 [pieces] or more is added (increased) in each additional effect.
Then, the number of the acquired round number suggestion icons displayed is increased to the same number as the number of round games corresponding to the type of the winning "small hit" by the additional effect of the final round.

In the present embodiment, as the type of the round number suggestion effect, the first round number suggestion effect and the second round number suggestion effect, in which the effect contents are different from each other, are set.
When the "first round number suggestion effect" is selected, the additional mode is always selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect. That is, when the first round number suggestion effect is selected, the additional effect of 1 [times] or more is always executed.
When the "second round number suggestion effect" is selected, the mode without addition or the mode with addition is selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect.
In the present embodiment, when the "V winning small hit" is won via the continuous battle effect, the "first round number suggestion effect" is selected as the type of the round number suggestion effect. On the other hand, when the "V winning small hit" is won via the one-shot battle effect, the "second round number suggestion effect" is selected as the type of the round number suggestion effect.

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a round number suggestion effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the round number suggestion effect lottery random number and the mode of the round number suggestion effect (round number suggestion effect number) is registered. There is.
In addition, as the round number suggestion effect lottery table, the first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the case of going through the continuous battle effect, and the second round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the case of going through the one-shot battle effect. Is stored.
Then, in the first round number suggestion effect lottery table, only the mode of the round number suggestion effect (corresponding) belonging to the mode with addition (corresponding) is registered (corresponding to the mode without addition). ) The mode of the round number suggestion effect (the round number suggestion effect number) is not registered).
On the other hand, in the second round number suggestion effect lottery table, the mode of the round number suggestion effect (corresponding) belonging to the mode with addition (corresponding) and the round number suggestion effect belonging to the mode without addition (corresponding) (Round number suggestion effect number) and is registered.
Further, as the first round number suggestion effect lottery table, the first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to each type of "small hit"("small hit 1" to "small hit 3") is stored.
Further, as the second round number suggestion effect lottery table, the first round number suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to each type of "small hit"("small hit 1" to "small hit 3") is stored.
Then, in each round number suggestion effect lottery table, the same number of acquired round number suggestion icons as the number of rounds related to each type of "small hit" corresponding to the round number suggestion effect lottery table are finally displayed. The mode of the number suggestion effect (the number of rounds suggestion effect number) is registered.

In the round number suggestion effect lottery process, first, the round number suggestion effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous battle effect.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous battle effect, the first round number suggestion effect effect lottery table corresponding to the type of "small hit" specified by the opening designation command is read out. Then, the mode (round number suggestion effect number) of the round number suggestion effect is determined based on the acquired round number suggestion effect lottery random number and the first round number suggestion effect lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous battle effect, the second round number suggestion effect effect lottery table corresponding to the type of "small hit" specified by the opening designation command is read out. Then, the mode (round number suggestion effect number) of the round number suggestion effect is determined based on the acquired round number suggestion effect lottery random number and the second round number suggestion effect lottery table.

In step S35-8, the battle icon lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-9. In the battle icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous battle effect (whether or not to acquire the battle icon).
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state is determined by the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the big hit game state. The result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the above is suggested.
Specifically, depending on the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the big hit game state, the special figure stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state. It is suggested whether or not the 2 start information includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.
In particular, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) executed after the end of the big hit game state, it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state. It is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is executed in the first to third special figure 2 start information includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won. To.
The battle icon is an effect that suggests (notifies) that a continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
In the present embodiment, if a battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect (big hit effect) described later, a continuous battle is performed after the end of the big hit game state. The production is executed. That is, the notification effect of each time (up to 3 [times]) executed after the end of the jackpot game state is an individual battle effect (continuous battle effect).
On the other hand, if the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the continuous battle effect is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. That is, the variable effect of each time executed after the end of the jackpot game state is a one-shot battle effect.
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state depends on whether or not the battle icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect. Among them, it is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won is included in the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is executed first to the third.
Then, when the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state (when the battle icon is displayed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state), the single-shot battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state (when the jackpot game state ends. Compared to (when the battle icon is not displayed during the occurrence of the big hit game state), the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state was won as a specific role. Special figure 2 indicating that the expected value for including the start information is high.

In the battle icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect execution condition (battle icon acquisition condition) is satisfied.
In the present embodiment, when the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "3" or more, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is satisfied, and the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is less than "3". In a certain case, it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is not satisfied.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is satisfied, a battle icon lottery for determining whether or not to execute the continuous battle effect (whether or not to acquire the battle icon) is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous battle effect execution condition is not satisfied, it is determined that the battle icon lottery is not executed and the continuous battle effect is not executed (the battle icon is not acquired).

Next, the battle icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a battle icon lottery table in which the winning price of the battle icon lottery is registered.
Further, as the battle icon lottery table, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to each pre-determination result pattern is stored.
The "preliminary determination result pattern" means a pattern of the result of the preliminary determination. As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, "Pattern A" to "Pattern D" are set as the pre-determination result pattern.
In "Pattern A", among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the hold information on which the notification display is executed is the first. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that a specific role has been won. In "Pattern A", the notification display is executed in the second and third positions of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area). It does not matter what the pending information is.
In "Pattern B", among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the hold information on which the notification display is executed is the first. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that the specific combination has not been won and that the pending information for which the notification display is executed second has won the specific combination. In "Pattern B", among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the hold for which the notification display is executed third is held. The content of the information does not matter.
In "Pattern C", among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the hold information for which the notification display is executed is the first hold information. It is specified that the specific role has not been won, the second hold information for which the notification display is executed specifies that the specific role has not been won, and the hold information for which the notification display is executed third is the specific role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that the player has won.
In the "pattern D", among the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area), the hold information for which the notification display is executed is the first hold information. It is specified that the specific role has not been won, the second hold information for which the notification display is executed specifies that the specific role has not been won, and the hold information for which the notification display is executed third is the specific role. It is a pre-judgment result pattern that specifies that the player has not won.
The probability of winning the battle icon lottery is the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C", the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B", the battle icon lottery table corresponding to "Pattern A", and "Pattern D". The battle icons corresponding to "" are set higher (high → low) in the order of the lottery table.

Then, in the battle icon lottery, first, the battle icon lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the contents of the hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) are confirmed. Then, the pre-determination result pattern (“Pattern A” to “Pattern D”) is determined. Further, the battle icon lottery table corresponding to the determined pre-judgment result pattern is read out.
Then, based on the acquired battle icon lottery random number and the battle icon lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the continuous battle effect (whether or not to acquire the battle icon). At this time, if the value of the acquired battle icon lottery random number matches the winning value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that continuous battle production is executed (battle icon is acquired). If the value of the acquired battle icon lottery random number does not match the winning value registered in the read battle icon lottery table, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not executed (the battle icon is not acquired). ..
Further, the pre-determination result pattern information indicating the determined pre-determination result pattern is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300.

In step S35-9, the celebration icon lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-10. In the celebration icon lottery process, it is determined whether or not to acquire the celebration icon.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, a preliminary determination based on the start information stored in the start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state is determined depending on whether or not the celebration icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect. The result of (step S9-8) is suggested.
Specifically, depending on whether or not the congratulatory icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state ( It is suggested whether or not the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination was won was included in all the special figure 2 start information).
In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state does not include the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won. In, the celebration icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect.
That is, when the congratulatory icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area at the start of the small hit game state. It is determined that the special figure 2 start information includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.
If the battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the congratulatory icon is not displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect. ..

In the congratulatory icon lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the congratulatory icon acquisition condition is satisfied.
In this embodiment, (1) it is decided not to acquire the battle icon in step S35-8, (2) the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is "1" or more, and (3). The hold information (special figure 2 start information) stored in the second hold information storage area (special figure 2 start information storage area) contains the hold information (special figure 2 start information) that specifies that the specific combination has been won. If all of the items included are satisfied, it is determined that the congratulatory icon acquisition condition is satisfied.
Then, if it is determined that the congratulatory icon acquisition condition is satisfied, a congratulatory icon lottery for determining whether or not to acquire the congratulatory icon is executed.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the congratulatory icon acquisition condition is not satisfied, the congratulatory icon lottery is not executed and it is determined not to acquire the congratulatory icon.

Next, the celebration icon lottery will be described.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a congratulatory icon lottery table in which the winning price of the congratulatory icon lottery is registered.
In the celebration icon lottery, first, the celebration icon lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired congratulatory icon lottery random number and the congratulatory icon lottery table, it is determined whether or not to acquire the congratulatory icon. At this time, if the value of the acquired congratulatory icon lottery random number matches the winning value registered in the congratulatory icon lottery table, it is determined that the congratulatory icon is acquired, and the value of the acquired congratulatory icon lottery random number is If it does not match the winning price registered in the read congratulatory icon lottery table, it is determined that the congratulatory icon is not acquired.

In step S35-10, the confrontation character lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-11. In the confrontation character lottery process, the type of confrontation character that appears (displays) in the battle type suggestion production is determined.
In the pachinko machine 1, the jackpot effect is executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. Then, as the type of the jackpot effect, "battle type suggestion effect" and "judgment effect" described later are set.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "small hit" is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the continuous chan period, and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. In addition, as a jackpot effect, a battle type suggestion effect is executed.
The "battle type suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests the type of battle effect (single-shot battle effect or continuous battle effect) that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
In particular, in the battle type suggestion effect, it is suggested whether or not to acquire the battle icon during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, depending on the type of the confronting character that appears.
Specifically, in the battle type suggestion effect, the effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character face each other is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, and depending on whether or not both the opposing characters start the battle. The type of battle effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot game state is suggested (notified).
At this time, when both characters facing each other start a battle, a battle icon is displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, suggesting that the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state ( Be notified).
On the other hand, if both characters facing each other do not start the battle, the battle icon is not displayed during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, suggesting that the one-shot battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state ( Be notified).

Then, in the battle type suggestion effect, the battle type suggestion effect is executed by the combination of the type of the ally character selected in advance and the type of the confronting character facing as the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "competition combination"). The expected value of acquiring a battle icon (a continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state) is suggested.
Here, the "expected value" means that when the battle combination is determined (displayed), a battle icon is acquired during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect (the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state). The degree of possibility.
In this embodiment, one type of enemy character is determined from six types of enemy characters (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) as the confrontation character appearing in the battle type suggestion production.
Then, when the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the continuous battle effect (individual battle effect for each time) is executed with the confronting character appearing in the battle type suggestion effect as the opponent.

The ROM of the staging control circuit 300 stores a confrontation character lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the confrontation character lottery random number and the type of the confrontation character (“enemy character A” to “enemy character F”) is registered. There is.
In addition, as a confrontation character lottery table, confrontation characters corresponding to each combination of battle icon acquisition status, celebration icon acquisition status, and ally character types ("Friend character A" to "Friend character C"). The lottery table is stored.
In the confrontation character lottery process, first, the confrontation character lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (acquisition of the battle icon is determined). Whether or not) and the acquisition status of the congratulatory icon determined in step S35-9 (whether or not the acquisition of the congratulatory icon is determined) are confirmed, and the confrontation character lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the type of the confronting character is determined based on the acquired confrontation character lottery random number and the confrontation character lottery table.

In step S35-11, the battle type suggestion effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S35-12. In the battle type suggestion effect setting process, the mode (big hit effect number) of the battle type suggestion effect is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a battle type suggestion effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the battle type suggestion effect lottery random number and the mode (big hit effect number) of the battle type suggestion effect is registered. Then, in each battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the jackpot effect number related to the battle type suggestion effect is registered.
In addition, as a battle type suggestion production lottery table, the acquisition status of battle icons, the acquisition status of celebration icons, the types of ally characters ("Friend character A" to "Friend character C"), and the types of confronting characters ("enemy"). A battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to each combination of "Character A" to "Enemy character F") is stored.
Then, in each battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the combination of the battle icon acquisition status corresponding to the battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the acquisition status of the celebration icon, the type of the ally character, and the type of the confronting character. The jackpot production number related to the battle type suggestion production corresponding to is registered.

In the battle type suggestion effect setting process, first, the battle type suggestion effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Further, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 and the acquisition status of the battle icon determined in step S35-8 (acquisition of the battle icon is determined). (Whether or not), the acquisition status of the celebration icon determined in step S35-9 (whether or not the acquisition of the celebration icon was decided), and the type of confrontation character determined in step S35-10. , Read the battle type suggestion effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result.
Then, based on the acquired battle type suggestion effect lottery random number and the battle type suggestion effect lottery table, the mode (big hit effect number) of the battle type suggestion effect is determined.
Further, the determined mode of the battle type suggestion effect (big hit effect number) is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S35-12, the small hit effect start process at the time of winning is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the small hit production start process at the time of winning, the small hit production is started.
In the winning small hit effect start process, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous battle effect is being executed. Here, when "1" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production, it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, and "0" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production. It is determined that the continuous battle production is not being executed.
Then, when it is determined that the continuous battle effect is being executed, the value of the individual battle count counter is confirmed. Further, with reference to the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S36-13, the small hit effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed individual battle number counter is read out. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the read small hit effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started. Further, the value of the individual battle count counter is reset, and "0" is set in the flag area during continuous battle production. This ends the continuous battle production.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the continuous battle effect is not being executed, the mode of the winning small hit effect (small hit effect number) is the mode of the winning small hit effect corresponding to the one-shot battle effect (small hit effect number). To decide. In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the determined mode of the small hit effect (small hit effect number) at the time of winning is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the small hit effect based on the set effect control table is started.

Next, the jackpot effect management process executed in step S32-8 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the jackpot effect management process.
When the jackpot effect management process is executed in step S32-8, as shown in FIG. 42, first, the process proceeds to step S36-1.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such command (No), the process proceeds to step S36-8.
Here, whether or not the opening designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the opening designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300.
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command specifies "big hit"("small hit continuation 1 big hit" to "small hit 6 continuous big hit,""big hit 1" or "small hit 2"). If it is determined that the opening designation command specifies "big hit" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the opening designation command does not specify "big hit" (No). ), The process proceeds to step S36-8.
In step S36-3, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command specifies "small hit continuous jackpot"("small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot"), and the opening designation command is "small". If it is determined that "hit continuous jackpot" is not specified ("big hit 1" or "big hit 2" is specified), the process proceeds to step S36-4, and the opening designation command is "small hit". If it is determined that "continuation jackpot" is specified (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-6.

In step 36-4, the judge staging lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-5. In the judge effect lottery process, the mode (big hit effect number) of the judge effect (big hit effect) is determined.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2" is won, the judge effect is executed as the big hit effect.
The "judgment effect" is an effect that suggests whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started).
In the present embodiment, the judge effect includes a ally character selection effect and a judge result effect.
The "ally character selection effect" is an effect of selecting the type of ally character ("ally character A" to "ally character C") according to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b by the player.
Specifically, during the execution of the ally character selection effect, the ally character selection image is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23. Further, during the execution of the ally character selection effect, the operation valid period during which the operation of pressing the effect button 5b is valid is set.
The display of the ally character selection image is started in response to the start of the ally character selection effect. Then, in the ally character selection image, one type of ally character from "ally character A" to "ally character C" is selected.
The operation validity period starts according to the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the ally character production. Then, during the operation valid period, each time the effect button 5b is pressed (every time the first operation signal is input from the first operation detection switch 24), the ally selected in the ally character selection image is selected. The type of character is changed.
The operation validity period ends according to the lapse of a predetermined time from the start. Then, in the ally character selection effect, at the end of the operation valid period, the type of the ally character selected in the ally character selection image is determined (confirmed) as the type of the ally character selected by the ally character selection effect. Will be done.
Then, at the end of the ally character selection effect, the ally character selection information that specifies the type of the ally character selected by the ally character selection effect is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
As a result, when the continuous chan period starts after the end of the jackpot game state, the ally character appears in the battle production (single battle production or continuous battle production) executed during the continuous chan period. A ally character related to the type selected by the character selection effect is set.

The "judgment result effect" is an effect that suggests whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started). At this time, in the judge result production, whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (the continuous chan period is started) depending on the production content corresponding to the type of the ally character selected by the ally character selection production. Whether or not) is suggested.
In the present embodiment, as the types of judge effects, "judgment effect A" corresponding to "ally character A", "judgment effect B" corresponding to "ally character B", and "ally character C" corresponding to "ally character C". "Judge production C" is set.
In the "judgment effect A", the effect image by the "ally character A" is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23.
In the "judgment effect B", the effect image by the "ally character B" is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23.
In the "judgment effect C", the effect image by the "ally character C" is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23.
Then, in "Judge effect A" to "Judge effect C", whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started) depends on the different effect contents. It is suggested.
In the "judgment effect A", the same type of identification information is displayed (stopped) at predetermined stop positions of the three drums 24a to 24c of the drum type display device 24 at a predetermined timing, based on whether or not the same type of identification information is displayed (stopped). It is suggested whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started).
In the "judgment effect B", the jackpot game state is determined by the operation of the effect button 5b during the operation valid period set during the execution of the judge effect, or by the effect displayed according to the elapse of the operation valid period. It is suggested whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end (whether or not the continuous chan period is started).
In "Judge effect C", whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state based on the number of judge icons (the number of acquired judge icons) displayed during the execution of the judge effect (ream). Whether or not the Chang period will start) is suggested.

The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a judge effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the judge effect lottery random number and the mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) is registered.
In addition, as a judge production lottery table, judges corresponding to each type of jackpot game state to be started (“small hit 1 continuous jackpot” to “small hit 6 continuous jackpot”, “big hit 1” and “big hit 2” respectively). The staging lottery table is stored.
In addition, when the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the time saving control as the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the "big hit 2". The corresponding judge effect lottery table and the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the case where "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery or 2nd special symbol lottery) executed while the time saving control is stopped. , Is stored.
Then, on the judge staging lottery table corresponding to "small hit 1 continuous big hit" to "small hit 6 continuous big hit" or "big hit 1", the time saving control is started after the end of the big hit gaming state (the continuous chan period is set). The mode (big hit production number) of the judge production related to the production content suggesting that it will be started) is registered.
On the other hand, in the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the case where the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the jackpot gaming state is displayed. The mode (big hit effect number) of the judge effect related to the effect content suggesting that the time reduction control is started (the continuous chan period is started) is registered after the end of.
On the other hand, in the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the case where the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) executed while the time reduction control is stopped, the jackpot gaming state is displayed. The mode (big hit effect number) of the judge effect related to the effect content suggesting that the time reduction control is not started (the continuous chan period is not started) is registered after the end of.

In the judge effect lottery process, first, a judge effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the judge effect lottery table corresponding to the winning type specified by the opening designation command is read out. At this time, if the winning type specified by the opening designation command is "big hit 2", it is determined whether or not "big hit 2" is won based on the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time saving control. , The judge effect lottery table corresponding to this determination result is read out. Then, based on the acquired judge effect lottery random number and the judge effect lottery table, the mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) is determined.

In step S36-5, the judge staging start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the judge production start process, the jackpot production is started.
In the judge effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) determined in step S36-4 is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the judge effect (big hit effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
In the judge effect start process, next, "1" is set in the flag area during the jackpot game state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S36-6, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous chan period, and if it is determined that it is not in the continuous chan period (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4 and it is determined that the continuous chan period is in progress. If yes, the process proceeds to step S36-7.
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined that the flag area is not in the continuous chan period, and if "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined. Judge that it is in the continuous Chan period.
In step S36-7, the battle type suggestion effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-8. In the battle type suggestion effect start process, the jackpot effect is started.
In the battle type suggestion effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the mode (big hit effect number) of the battle type suggestion effect stored (saved) in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 in step S35-11 is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the battle type suggestion effect (big hit effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, in the battle type suggestion effect start process, "1" is set in the flag area during the jackpot game state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Further, "1" is set in the flag area during the battle type suggestion effect of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S36-8, it is determined whether or not the ending designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the ending designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-9 and the ending designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
Here, whether or not the ending designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the ending designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S36-9, it is determined whether or not the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified, and if it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-10. If it is determined that the end of the jackpot game state is not specified (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9).
Here, when "1" is set in the jackpot gaming state flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the end of the jackpot gaming state is specified, and the jackpot gaming state flag area is set. When "0" is set, it is determined that the end of the jackpot game state is not specified.

In step S36-10, it is determined whether or not the battle type suggestion effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is not being executed (the judge effect is being executed), step (No). When the process proceeds to S36-11 and it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-12.
Here, when "1" is set in the battle type suggestion effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is being executed, and the battle type suggestion effect flag area is determined. When "0" is set in, it is determined that the battle type suggestion effect is not being executed.
In step S36-11, the inrush state suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush state suggestion effect start process, the ending effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the ending effect is executed during the ending period during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. Then, as the type of the ending effect, "rush state suggestion effect" and "rush battle type suggestion effect", which will be described later, are set.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2" is won, the rush state suggestion effect is executed as the ending effect.
The "rush state suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests (notifies) whether or not to enter the "continuous chan period" after the end of the jackpot game state.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a rush state suggestion effect selection table in which correspondences between each mode of the judge effect (big hit effect number) and the mode of the rush state suggestion effect (ending effect number) are registered. There is.
In the rush state suggestion effect start process, first, the type of judge effect (big hit effect number) determined in step S36-4 is confirmed. In addition, the rush state suggestion effect selection table is read out. Then, the mode (ending effect number) of the rush state suggestion effect is determined based on the confirmed judge effect type (big hit effect number) and the rush state suggestion effect selection table.
Then, the effect control table corresponding to the determined mode of the rush state suggestion effect (ending effect number) is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the rush state suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, in the rush state suggestion effect start process, "0" is set in the flag area during the jackpot game state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S36-12, it is determined whether or not the battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the acquisition of the battle icon has been decided in step S35-8), and it is determined that the battle icon has been acquired. If yes, the process proceeds to step S36-13, and if it is determined that the battle icon has not been acquired (No), the process proceeds to step S36-14.

In step 36-13, the continuous battle effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S36-14. In the continuous battle production lottery process, the mode of the continuous battle production (continuous battle production number) is determined.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores a continuous battle effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the continuous battle effect lottery random number and the mode of the continuous battle effect (continuous battle effect number) is registered.
In addition, as a continuous battle production lottery table, the type of ally character ("Friend character A" to "Friend character C"), the type of confronting character ("Enemy character A" to "Enemy character F"), and the preliminary judgment result A continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to each combination of patterns (“Pattern A” to “Pattern D”) is stored.
In each continuous battle production lottery table, a continuous battle production in which an ally character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production lottery table and a confronting character related to the type corresponding to the continuous battle production lottery table are played against each other The battle production number is registered.

Continuous battle effect corresponding to "Pattern A" The lottery table consists of 1 [time] individual battle effect, 1 [time] stop effect, and 1 [time] small hit effect. The continuous battle production number related to the production is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to "Pattern A", the content that the ally character is advantageous in the first individual battle production (this implementation). In the form, the staging image (contents in which the attack on the enemy character by the ally character is successful) is displayed. In addition, in the first stop effect, an effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the first small hit effect, an effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

Continuous battle production corresponding to "Pattern B" The lottery table consists of 2 [time] individual battle production, 2 [time] stop production, and 2 [time] small hit production. The continuous battle production number related to the production is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B", the content that the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (this implementation). In the form, the staging image (contents in which the attack by the ally character against the enemy character fails) is displayed. In addition, in the first stop effect, an effect image showing the failure of the attack by the ally character is displayed. Further, in the first small hit effect, an effect image showing that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle production, the content that the ally character is advantageous (in this embodiment, the content that the ally character avoids the attack on the ally character and then the ally character succeeds in counterattacking the enemy character). The production image of is displayed. In addition, in the second stop effect, an effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the second small hit effect, an effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

Continuous battle production corresponding to "Pattern C" The lottery table consists of 3 [time] individual battle production, 3 [time] stop production, and 3 [time] small hit production. The continuous battle production number related to the production is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C", the content that the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (this implementation). In the form, the staging image (contents in which the attack by the ally character against the enemy character fails) is displayed. In addition, in the first stop effect, an effect image showing the failure of the attack by the ally character is displayed. Further, in the first small hit effect, an effect image showing that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle production, the production image of the content that the ally character is disadvantageous (in this embodiment, the content that the enemy character successfully attacks the ally character) is displayed. In addition, in the second stop effect, an effect image showing that the ally character has fallen is displayed. Further, in the second small hit effect, an effect image showing that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the third individual battle production, the production image of the content in which the ally character is advantageous (in the present embodiment, the content in which the ally character is revived (stands up)) is displayed. In addition, in the third stop effect, an effect image showing the victory of the ally character is displayed. In addition, in the third small hit effect, an effect image showing that the specific combination has been won is displayed.

Continuous battle production corresponding to "Pattern D" The lottery table consists of 4 [time] individual battle production, 4 [time] stop production, and 4 [time] small hit production. The continuous battle production number related to the production is registered.
Then, in the continuous battle production corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to "Pattern D", the content that the ally character is disadvantageous in the first individual battle production (this implementation). In the form, the staging image (contents in which the attack by the ally character against the enemy character fails) is displayed. In addition, in the first stop effect, an effect image showing the failure of the attack by the ally character is displayed. Further, in the first small hit effect, an effect image showing that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the second individual battle production, the production image of the content that the ally character is disadvantageous (in this embodiment, the content that the enemy character successfully attacks the ally character) is displayed. In addition, in the second stop effect, an effect image showing that the ally character has fallen is displayed. Further, in the second small hit effect, an effect image showing that the continuous battle effect is continued is displayed.
In addition, in the third individual battle production, the production image of the content that the ally character is disadvantageous (the content that the ally character does not revive (cannot stand up) in this embodiment) is displayed. In addition, in the third stop effect, an effect image showing the defeat of the ally character is displayed. Further, in the third small hit effect, an effect image indicating the end of the continuous battle effect (transition to the one-shot battle effect) is displayed.

Further, the ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each mode (each continuous battle effect number) of the continuous battle effect.
The "continuous battle effect control data" is information for executing (controlling) the continuous battle effect. The continuous battle effect control data includes information that specifies the number of individual battle effects included in the continuous battle effect, information that specifies the mode (variable effect number) of each individual battle effect (variable effect), and individual battles for each time. Includes information that specifies the mode of the stop effect (variable effect number) that is executed after the end of the effect, information that specifies the mode of the small hit effect (variable effect number) that is executed after the end of each individual battle effect, and so on. It is configured.
Specifically, the continuous battle production control data corresponding to each continuous battle production number registered in the continuous battle production lottery table corresponding to "Pattern A" includes the mode of one individual battle production (variable production). Information for designating (variable effect number), information for specifying the mode of one stop effect (variable effect number), and information for specifying the mode of one small hit effect (variable effect number) are included.
In addition, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern B" includes the mode (variable effect) of the individual battle effect (variable effect) for two times. Information for designating the mode (number)), information for designating the mode of the stop effect for two times (variable effect number), and information for specifying the mode of the small hit effect for two times (variable effect number) are included.
In addition, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to each continuous battle effect number registered in the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to "Pattern C" or "Pattern D" includes three individual battle effects (variable effect). Information that specifies the mode (variable effect number) of the three times, information that specifies the mode (variable effect number) of the stop effect for three times, and information that specifies the mode (variable effect number) of the small hit effect for three times. There is.

In the continuous battle effect lottery process, first, a continuous battle effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter.
Further, the type of the ally character specified by the ally character selection information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the type of the confronting character determined in step S35-10, and the type of the confronting character determined in step S35-8 are determined. Check the pre-judgment result pattern and read out the continuous battle effect lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result.
Then, the mode (continuous battle production number) of the continuous battle production is determined based on the acquired continuous battle production lottery random number and the continuous battle production lottery table.
Further, the continuous battle effect control data corresponding to the determined continuous battle effect number is read out, and the read continuous battle effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, a continuous battle effect (variable effect, stop effect, small hit effect) based on the continuous battle effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300 is executed.
Further, in the continuous battle effect lottery process, "1" is set in the continuous battle effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

In step S36-14, the rush battle type suggestion effect start process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-9). In the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, the ending effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the "small hit" is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the consecutive chan period, and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, As the ending effect, the rush battle type suggestion effect is executed.
The "rush battle type suggestion effect" is an effect that suggests (notifies) the type of battle effect ("single-shot battle effect" or "continuous battle effect") that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
In the ROM of the effect control circuit 300, as the mode (ending effect number) of the rush battle type suggestion effect, there are a mode corresponding to the case of entering the single-shot battle effect and a mode corresponding to the case of entering the continuous battle effect. It is set.
In the rush battle type suggestion effect relating to the mode corresponding to the case of rushing into the one-shot battle effect, the rush into the one-shot battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggestion effect relating to the mode corresponding to the case of rushing into the continuous battle effect, the rush to the continuous battle effect is suggested (notified).
In the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, first, it is determined whether or not the battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (whether or not the acquisition of the battle icon has been determined in step S35-8).
Then, when it is determined that the battle icon has been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state (acquisition of the battle icon has been determined in step S35-8), the mode of the rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect number) is used. , Determine the mode corresponding to the case of entering the continuous battle production.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the battle icon has not been acquired during the occurrence of the jackpot game state (acquisition of the battle icon has not been determined in step S35-8), the mode of the rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect). As the number), the mode corresponding to the case of entering the one-shot battle production is determined.
In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the determined mode of the rush battle effect suggestion effect (ending effect number) is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the rush battle type suggestion effect (ending effect) based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, in the rush battle type suggestion effect start process, "0" is set in the flag area during the jackpot game state of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. Further, "0" is set in the battle type suggestion effect during effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.

Next, the V winning effect management process executed in step S32-9 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the V winning effect management process.
When the V winning effect management process is executed in step S32-9, first, as shown in FIG. 43, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the V prize designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the V prize designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the V prize designation command is issued. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10).
Here, whether or not the V prize designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the V prize designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S37-2, the V winning notification effect start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-3. In the V winning notification effect start process, the V winning notification effect is started.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, when the passage of a specific area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the V winning notification effect suggesting (notifying) the passage of the V area by the game ball is executed. Will be done.
In the V winning notification effect start process, the effect control table corresponding to the V winning notification effect is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the V winning notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not it is in the continuous chan period, and if it is determined that it is in the continuous chan period (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and it is determined that it is not in the continuous chan period. If (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10).
Here, if "0" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined that the flag area is not in the continuous chan period, and if "1" is set in the flag area during the continuous chan period, it is determined. Judge that it is in the continuous Chan period.
In step S37-4, the round number suggestion effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-10). In the round number suggestion effect start process, the round number suggestion effect is started.
The ROM of the effect control circuit 300 stores round number suggestion effect control data corresponding to each mode (each round number suggestion effect number) of the round number suggestion effect.
The "round number suggestion effect control data" is information for executing (controlling) the round number suggestion effect. The round number suggestion effect control data includes information that specifies the mode of the initial notification effect (initial notification effect) included in the round number suggestion effect, information that specifies the number of additional effects included in the round number suggestion effect, and each time. It is composed of information for designating the mode of the additional effect (additional effect number), information for specifying the execution trigger of each additional effect, and the like. In the present embodiment, the execution trigger of each additional effect is set during the occurrence of the small hit game state or the occurrence of the big hit game state.
In the round number suggestion effect start process, the round number suggestion effect control data corresponding to the mode (round number suggestion effect number) of the round number suggestion effect determined in step S35-7 is read out. Then, the read round number suggestion effect control data is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
Further, the mode of the initial notification effect (initial notification effect number) is confirmed with reference to the round number suggestion effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the confirmed mode of the initial notification effect (initial notification effect number) is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the initial notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.
Further, the number of times of the additional staging is confirmed by referring to the round number suggestion staging control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the staging control circuit 300. When the number of additional effects is "1" or more, the number of additional effects is set in the additional effect counter, and "1" is set in the RAM additional effect flag area of the effect control circuit 300. ..

Next, the additional effect management process executed in step S32-10 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the additional effect management process.
When the addition effect management process is executed in step S32-10, first, as shown in FIG. 44, the process proceeds to step S38-1.
In step S38-1, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the additional effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, and it is determined that "1" is set in the additional effect flag area (). In Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-2, and when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the addition effect flag area (No), a series of processes are performed. The process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-2, with reference to the round number suggestion effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, an opportunity to execute the additional effect corresponding to the value of the current additional effect count counter has arrived. When it is determined whether or not the addition effect has been executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and when it is determined that the addition effect execution opportunity has not arrived (No). , The series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11).
In step S38-3, the addition effect start process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-11). In the additional effect start process, the additional effect is started.
In the addition effect start process, first, the value of the addition effect count counter is confirmed. Further, with reference to the round number suggestion effect control data set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300, the additional effect number corresponding to the value of the confirmed additional effect number counter is read out. Further, the effect control table corresponding to the read-out additional effect number is read. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the additional effect based on the set effect control table is started.
In addition, "1" is subtracted from the value of the number of additional effects. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the additional effect count counter is "0". Then, when it is determined that the value of the additional effect number counter is "0", "0" is set in the additional effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the additional effect count counter is not "0"("1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the additional effect flag area is maintained.

Next, the launch position display management process executed in step S32-11 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a launch position display management process.
When the launch position display management process is executed in step S32-11, first, as shown in FIG. 45, the process proceeds to step S39-1.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not the right-handed notification start designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the right-handed notification start designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2 to the right. If it is determined that the hit notification start designation command has not been received (No), the process proceeds to step S39-3.
Here, whether or not the right-handed notification start designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the right-handed notification start designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S39-2, the right-handed notification start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S39-3. In the right-handed notification start process, the right-handed notification effect is started.
In the pachinko machine 1, during the period in which at least one of the conditions of the big hit gaming state is occurring, the small hit gaming state is occurring, and the consecutive chan period is in progress, A right-handed notification effect for designating (notifying) the launch of the game ball to the right-side route 30b is executed.
In the right-handed notification effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, information for designating the launch of the game ball to the right-hand path 30b (in the present embodiment, the character "right-handed" and the figure of the arrow pointing to the right side). ) Is displayed.
In the right-handed notification start process, "1" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In addition, the effect control table corresponding to the right-handed notification effect is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the right-handed notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

In step S39-3, it is determined whether or not the right-handed notification end designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the right-handed notification end designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-4 and the right If it is determined that the command to specify the end of the hit notification has not been received (No), a series of processes are terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-12).
Here, whether or not the right-handed notification end designation command has been received is determined based on whether or not the right-handed notification end designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
In step S39-4, the right-handed notification end process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-12). In the right-handed notification end process, the right-handed notification effect is ended.
In the right-handed notification start process, the right-handed notification effect is ended, and "0" is set in the right-handed notification flag area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300.
At this time, the left-handed notification effect may be started.
In the left-handed notification effect, on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, the information for designating the launch of the game ball to the left side path 30a (in the present embodiment, the characters "Please return to left-handed" and the left side are displayed. The figure of the pointing arrow) is displayed.
With such a configuration, the effect control table corresponding to the left-handed notification effect is read out. Then, the read-out effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control circuit 300. As a result, the left-handed notification effect based on the set effect control table is started.

(Operation of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the game ball passes through the start gate 41, various random numbers such as hit random numbers are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are stored in the normal map start information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal map start information. Will be done.
Then, with respect to the normal map start information stored in the normal map start information storage area, the normal map start determination including the normal map start determination for determining the lottery result (“normal map hit” or “missing”) in a predetermined order. Is executed.
When the normal symbol start determination is executed, the normal symbol display device 60 displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and then displays the stop display of the normal symbol in an manner according to the result of the normal symbol winning determination.
Then, when it is determined by the normal symbol winning determination that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "normal symbol hit", the normal symbol hit game state is generated after the stop display of the normal symbol is executed.
In the normal game state, the ordinary electric accessory 52a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the second starting port 52.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball enters the starting ports 51 and 52, various random numbers such as a hit random number, a symbol random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and the acquired various random numbers are used to start a special figure. Information (special figure 1 start information or special figure 2 start information) is stored in the special figure start information storage area (special figure 1 start information storage area or special figure 2 start information storage area) of the RAM 230.
Then, with respect to the special figure start information stored in the special figure start information storage area, the special figure winning judgment and the stop of determining the lottery result (“big hit”, “small hit” or “missing”) in a predetermined order. A start determination including a stop symbol determination for determining a symbol and a variation pattern determination for determining the type of variation pattern related to the variation display for notifying the result of the special symbol winning determination is executed.
In addition, when it is determined that the "big hit" or "small hit" has been won by the special figure winning judgment, the winning type (type of the big hit gaming state or the type of the small hit gaming state) is determined by the stop symbol judgment. To.
Here, in the first special symbol lottery (special figure winning determination based on the special drawing 1 start information), the "small hit" is not won (the lottery result is "big hit" or "missing").
On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery (special figure winning determination based on the special drawing 2 start information), the "missing" is not won (the lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit").
In addition, as a type of small hit gaming state that occurs when a "small hit" is won, "V winning possible small hit" that allows the game ball to pass through the V region while the small hit gaming state is occurring. ("Small hit 1" to "Small hit 3") and "V winning impossible small hit"("Smallhit" that makes it impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. "Hit 4" to "Small hit 6") are set.

When the start determination is executed, the special symbol display devices 61 and 62 display the variation of the special symbol based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation pattern determination, and then the result of the stop symbol determination. The stop display of the special symbol is performed according to the mode according to the above.
Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "big hit" by the special symbol winning determination, after the stop display of the special symbol is executed, the jackpot game state related to the type determined by the stop symbol determination is executed. Is caused.
In the jackpot game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric accessory 53a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, during each round game, the game ball can be entered into the grand prize device 53.

On the other hand, when the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "small hit" by the special symbol winning determination, the small hit related to the type determined by the stop symbol determination after the stop display of the special symbol is executed. A gaming state is created.
In the small hit game state, the small hit game in which the special electric accessory 54a is displaced from the closed state to the open state is executed. Then, during the small hit game, the game ball can be entered into the accessory winning device 54.
Then, when the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the big hit game state is started according to the end of the small hit game state.
At this time, if "small hit 1" is won, "small hit 1 continuous big hit" is started, and if "small hit 2" is won, "small hit 2 continuous big hit" is started and " If you win "small hit 3", "small hit 3 continuous big hit" is started, and if you win "small hit 4", "small hit 4 continuous big hit" is started and "small hit 5" If you win, "small hit 5 consecutive big hits" is started, and if you win "small hit 6", "small hit 6 continuous big hits" is started.
On the other hand, if the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit game state, the state shifts to the "special figure change waiting state".

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined condition including the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is satisfied, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot gaming state.
During the time reduction control execution, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol is shortened as compared with the time reduction control being stopped, and the opening time of the normal electric accessory 52a is extended in the normal game state. The number of openings is increased). As a result, there is a higher possibility that the second special symbol lottery will be executed during the execution of the time reduction control as compared with the case where the time reduction control is stopped (it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52). Will be).
In the present embodiment, when a jackpot gaming state related to "big hit 1" or "small hit 1 continuous jackpot" to "small hit 6 continuous jackpot" occurs, the time reduction control is performed according to the end of the jackpot gaming state. Is started.
Further, when the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery executed during the execution of the time saving control, the time saving control is started according to the end of the big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2" is won by the special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the time saving control is not started according to the end of the big hit gaming state.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the player can acquire a large number of prize balls by inserting the game ball into the big prize device 53 during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a role in which a jackpot gaming state can be generated by the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as “big hit trigger”) is determined by the first special symbol lottery. It is set higher than the probability of winning.
In the present embodiment, the "big hit trigger" is "big hit 1", "big hit 2", or "small hit 1" to "small hit 3".
Therefore, the player advances the game with the aim of obtaining more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery.
However, in the pachinko machine 1, it is difficult to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery while the time reduction control is stopped, while it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery while the time reduction control is being executed. It will be easy.
Therefore, since it is difficult to obtain an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery while the time reduction control is stopped, the player can start the time reduction control by the first special symbol lottery ("big hit 1"). ”) To win the game.
On the other hand, since it becomes easy to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery during the execution of the time reduction control, the player can generate a big hit game state by the second special symbol lottery (“V prize”). The game progresses with the aim of winning "possible small hits", "big hits 1" or "big hits 2").

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, obtaining the opportunity of the second special lottery is advantageous to the player in obtaining the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery.
Then, during the execution of the time reduction control, it becomes easier to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery as compared with the case where the time reduction control is stopped, which is advantageous to the player.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving control for each time is (1) winning a "big hit" by a special symbol lottery, and (2) winning a V during the occurrence of a small hit gaming state (passing the V region by a game ball). ) Was detected, (3) the total number of fluctuations executed during the time reduction control reached a predetermined first time reduction number (100 [times] in this embodiment), and (4) the time reduction control. It is terminated when one of the conditions that the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 executed during the process reaches a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment) is satisfied.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area is given priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. The start judgment (special figure hit judgment, special figure stop symbol judgment, special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, etc.) is executed.
Then, when the time reduction control is terminated in response to the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 executed during the time reduction control reaching a predetermined second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment). , When the special figure 2 start information of "1" or more is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (when the special figure 2 hold number is "1" or more), after the time saving control is completed. Even if there is, the player will be in an advantageous state until the special figure winning determination (second special symbol lottery) is executed for all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. ..
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the following "ream-chan period" is defined as a gaming period in which the gaming state is favorable to the player (a state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed).
That is, as shown in FIG. 46, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 1" is won by the first special symbol lottery executed while the time saving control is stopped, the jackpot gaming state ends (start of the time saving control). ) Is started.
The continuous Chan period continues as long as the time reduction control is being executed or the jackpot gaming state is occurring.
Then, during the continuous change period, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the special figure 2 start information storage area If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in (the special figure 2 hold number is “0”), the process is terminated according to the end of the time reduction control.
In the following description, when the time saving control is stopped in response to the value of the time saving counter (first time saving counter or the second time saving counter) becoming "0", it is stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area. The special figure 2 start information is referred to as "reserved special figure 2 start information at the end of time reduction". Further, among the special figure 2 start information held at the end of the time reduction, the special figure 2 start information in which the start determination is finally executed is referred to as "final special figure 2 start information".
On the other hand, during the continuous change period, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the special figure 2 start information storage area When "1" or more of the special figure 2 start information is stored (the number of reserved special figures 2 is "1" or more), the time reduction control is not terminated. In this case, the continuous Chan period is continued at least until the end of the small hit game state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information (holding at the end of all time reductions except the final special figure 2 start information). Special figure 2 When the start information indicates "V winning impossible small hit"). At this time, if the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the continuous chan period ends according to the end of the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the continuous Chan period is continued thereafter.
In the following explanation, the period from the stop of the time saving control to the end of the small hit game state (small hit game state related to the end of the continuous chan period) generated based on the final special figure 2 start information is referred to as ". "Advantageous period after shortening the working hours".
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the pachinko machine 1 has a plurality of different gaming states (during the execution of the time saving control, during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, and during the stopping of the time saving control (advantageous period after the time saving)). The period is specified.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving control is being executed because the time saving control is being executed, the jackpot gaming state is occurring, and the time saving control is stopped (the advantageous period after the time saving) is defined as the continuous change period. And, as compared with the case where the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is defined as the continuous chan period, the continuation rate during the continuous chan period can be improved.
Here, the "continuation rate during the continuous chan period" is a combination in which the time reduction control can be started based on the special symbol lottery executed during the continuous chan period (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction start combination"). The probability of winning.
In the present embodiment, the time saving start combination related to the execution of the time saving control is "big hit 1", "big hit 2", or "small hit 1 continuous big hit" to "small hit 3 continuous big hit". On the other hand, the time saving start combination related to the time saving control being stopped is "big hit 1" or "small hit 1 continuous big hit" to "small hit 3 continuous big hit".
First, a method of calculating the continuation rate during each period during the execution of the time reduction control and during the advantageous period after the time reduction will be described.
The continuation rate X during each period is calculated by the following formula (1).
X = 1-Y ・ ・ ・ Equation (1)
Here, "Y" has a probability of not being elected as a time-saving starter during the period.
Further, "Y" is calculated by the following formula (2).
Y = y ^z ... Equation (2)
Here, "y" is a probability of losing to the time-saving start combination by the second special symbol lottery (start determination) each time. Further, "z" is the number of executions of the second special symbol lottery, which is the end condition of the period.
In the present embodiment, “z” = the second number of time reductions (4 [times] in the present embodiment) during the execution of the time reduction control. On the other hand, during the advantageous period after the time reduction, “z” = the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces in Special Figure 2 (4 [pieces] in this embodiment).
Further, y is calculated by the following formula (3).
y = 1-W ・ ・ ・ Equation (3)
Here, "W" is the probability of winning the time-saving start combination by the second special symbol lottery (start determination) each time.

Then, the continuation rate during execution of the time saving control is calculated by the following.
That is, the probability of winning "big hit 1" or "big hit 2" while executing the time saving control is "1/199".
In addition, the probability of winning "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" during the execution of the time reduction control is "39.6 / 199" (198/199 (probability of winning a small hit) x 20/100 ( Probability that "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are selected)).
Therefore, during the execution of the time reduction control, "W" ≈ 0.204 (probability of winning 1/199 ("big hit 1" or "big hit 2")) + 39.6/199 ("small hit 1" to "small hit 1" to " Probability of winning 3 "small hits)).
Further, according to the above equation (3), “y” ≈0.796 while the time saving control is being executed.
Here, during the execution of the time reduction control, “z” = the second time reduction number (4 [times] in this embodiment). Therefore, according to the above equation (2), “Y” ≈0.401 during execution of the time saving control.
Therefore, according to the above equation (1), the continuation rate “X” ≈0.599 (about 60%) during execution of the time reduction control.

On the other hand, the continuation rate during the advantageous period after the time reduction (while the time reduction control is stopped) is calculated by the following.
That is, the probability of winning "big hit 1" while the time reduction control is stopped is "0.4 / 199" (1/199 (probability of winning big hit) x 40/100 ("big hit 1" is selected. Probability)).
In addition, the probability of winning "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" while the time reduction control is stopped is "39.6 / 199" (198/199 (probability of winning a small hit) x 20/100 ( Probability that "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are selected)).
Therefore, while the time reduction control is stopped, "W" ≈ 0.20 (0.4 / 199 (probability of winning "big hit 1") + 39.6/199 ("small hit 1" to "small hit 3") Probability of winning)).
Further, according to the above equation (3), “y” ≈0.80 while the time reduction control is stopped.
Here, during the advantageous period after the time reduction, “z” = the upper limit of the number of reserved pieces in FIG. 2 (4 [pieces] in this embodiment). Therefore, according to the above equation (2), “Y” ≈0.409 during the advantageous period after the time reduction.
Therefore, according to the above equation (1), the continuation rate “X” ≈0.591 (about 59%) during the advantageous period after the time reduction.

On the other hand, the continuation rate during the continuous Chan period according to this embodiment is calculated as follows.
That is, "Y" during the continuous change period according to the present embodiment is calculated by the following formula (4).
Y = Y1 × Y2 = ・ ・ ・ Equation (4)
Here, "Y1" is a probability that the time saving start combination is not won during the execution of the time saving control ("Y" related to the execution of the time saving control described above). Further, "Y2" has a probability of not winning the time-saving start combination during the time-saving advantageous period ("Y" related to the above-mentioned time-saving advantageous period).
Here, as described above, "Y1" ≈0.401 and "Y2" ≈0.409.
Therefore, “Y” ≈0.164 during the continuous Chan period.
Therefore, according to the above equation (1), the continuation rate “X” ≈0.836 (about 83%) during the continuous Chan period.

From the above, when the execution of the time reduction control and the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state are defined as the continuous chan period, the continuation rate during the continuous chan period matches the continuation rate during the execution of the above time reduction control. do. That is, the continuation rate during the continuous Chan period is "0.599" (about 60%).
On the other hand, if the time saving control is being executed, the jackpot gaming state is occurring, and the time saving control is stopped (advantageous period after the time saving) is specified as the continuous chan period, the continuation rate during the continuous chan period is , "0.836" (about 83%).
Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the continuation rate during the continuous chan period can be improved as compared with the case where the time saving control is being executed and the jackpot gaming state is occurring as the continuous chan period.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a predetermined mode of staging (variable staging, stop staging, small hit staging, V winning staging, and big hit staging) is executed during the continuous chan period. That is, during the consecutive chan period, a variable effect (of a mode (content) related to each other), a stop effect, a small hit effect, a V winning effect, and a big hit effect that share the same theme (theme) with each other are executed. To.
That is, during the continuous chan period, the theme is common during the execution of the time reduction control, the occurrence of the jackpot game state, and the stoppage of the time reduction control (advantageous period after the time reduction) (related aspects (contents). ) Is executed.
As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can give the player the impression that a series of gaming states are continuing during the continuous chan period.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, the production (variable production, stop production, etc.) with the theme (theme) of "competition" during the occurrence of the big hit game state related to the "first hit" and during the continuous Chan period. Small hit effect, V prize effect, and big hit effect) are executed.
Here, the "first hit" means a "big hit"("big hit 1" or "big hit 2") won from the first special symbol lottery (starting determination) executed while the time saving control is stopped.
Then, when the "first hit" is won, the judge effect is executed as the jackpot effect executed during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state related to the "first hit".
The judge effect is composed of a ally character selection effect and a judge result effect.
Then, in the ally character selection effect, it is possible to select the type of the ally character ("ally character A" to "ally character C") according to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b by the player.
Further, in the judge result production, it is suggested whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started). At this time, depending on the effect content corresponding to the type of the ally character selected by the ally character selection effect, whether or not the time reduction control is started after the end of the jackpot game state (whether or not the continuous chan period is started). Is suggested.

When the "big hit 1" is won as the "first hit", the time reduction control is started and the continuous chan period is started according to the end of the big hit game state related to the "first hit".
Then, it is executed during the notification effect (variation effect and stop effect) executed during the notification display based on the second special symbol lottery (start determination) executed during the continuous Chan period, and during the occurrence of the small hit game state. As a small hit production, a battle production is executed.
In the battle production, a production image in which the ally character and the enemy character play against each other is displayed, and the result of the special symbol lottery (“V winning small hit” or “V winning impossible small hit”) depends on the content of the production image. Suggested (notified). At this time, as the ally character, the ally character related to the type selected by the ally character selection effect related to the "first hit" is set.

In addition, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting judgment) executed during the consecutive Chan period, the player wins the "V winning small hit", and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. If so, a round number suggestion effect (initial notification effect) is executed as a V prize effect.
Here, when the mode without addition is selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect, the initial notification effect is executed as the round number suggestion effect during the occurrence of the small hit game state.
On the other hand, when the additional mode is selected as the mode of the round number suggestion effect, the initial notification effect is executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state as the round number suggestion effect, and the big hit game state is generated. During this, an additional effect of 1 [times] or more is executed.
Then, in the round number suggestion effect, the number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state generated in response to the passage of the V region by the game ball is suggested.

Here, if the "V winning small hit" is won based on the second special symbol lottery (starting judgment) executed during the continuous Chan period, the first pre-judgment and the second pre-judgment are executed. ..
In the first pre-judgment, among the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area, the content of the special figure 2 start information in which the start judgment is executed first to the third (special figure hit judgment). Result) is determined.
On the other hand, in the second preliminary determination, the contents of all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (result of the special figure winning determination) are determined.
Further, in the present embodiment, one-shot battle production and continuous battle production are set as the types of battle production.
Then, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting judgment) executed during the continuous Chan period, the player wins the "V winning small hit", and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. If so, the result of the first pre-determination is suggested by the type of battle effect executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
At this time, the expected value when the continuous battle effect is executed is higher than the expected value when the single-shot battle effect is executed. The "expected value" here is the special figure 2 start information related to the first pre-judgment (the first to third start judgments of the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area). It is an expected value that the special figure 2 start information to be executed includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.

In addition, based on the second special symbol lottery (starting judgment) executed during the consecutive Chan period, the player wins the "V winning small hit", and the passage of the V area by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. If so, a battle type suggestion effect is executed as a jackpot effect executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state.
In the battle type suggestion effect, the effect image in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23, and the jackpot game state is determined by whether or not both the confronting characters start the battle. The type of battle effect to be executed after the end is suggested (notified).
Here, in the battle type suggestion effect, the ally character related to the type selected by the ally character selection effect related to the "first hit" is set as the ally character. In addition, when the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the enemy character (confrontation character) confronted in the battle type suggestion effect as the enemy character appearing in the continuous battle effect (individual battle effect of each time). ) Is set.

Further, during the execution of the battle suggestion effect, it is suggested whether or not the continuous battle effect is executed after the end of the jackpot game state, depending on whether or not the battle icon is acquired.
Specifically, when the battle icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (when the battle icon is acquired) during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, after the end of the jackpot game state, A continuous battle production is executed.
On the other hand, if the battle icon is not displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (when the battle icon is not acquired) during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, after the end of the jackpot game state, A one-shot battle production is executed.
Further, during the execution of the battle effect, the result of the second preliminary determination is suggested depending on whether or not the celebration icon is acquired.
Specifically, when the congratulatory icon is displayed on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23 (when the congratulatory icon is acquired) during the execution of the battle type suggestion effect, the special figure relating to the second prior determination is made. It is determined that the 2 start information (special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area) includes the special figure 2 start information indicating that the specific combination has been won.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the continuation rate is increased by executing the predetermined mode of staging (variable staging, stop staging, small hit staging, V winning staging, and big hit staging) during the continuous chan period. It is possible to suggest to the player that the high game period (ream-chan period) continues.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, during the continuous chan period, the time saving control is being executed and the time saving control is stopped (during the advantageous period after the time saving). By executing the winning effect, the V winning effect, and the big hit effect), it is possible to give the player the impression that a series of gaming states are continuing even if the gaming states are internally different. can.
Specifically, when the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (step S11-7) based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time reduction control and the time reduction end condition are satisfied (the value of the second time reduction counter is "". When the time saving control is terminated in response to "0"), the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area (hereinafter referred to as "pending second special game information") Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination (step S11-7), based on the fluctuation pattern lottery table (special figure 2 first fluctuation pattern lottery table and special figure 2 second fluctuation pattern lottery table) including the same type of fluctuation pattern. The type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined.
In the present embodiment, the special figure variation pattern determination (step S11-7) based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time saving control and the special figure variation pattern determination based on the reserved second special game information (step S11). In -7), the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined based on the variation pattern lottery table (special figure 2 first variation pattern lottery table and special figure 2 second variation pattern lottery table) having the same contents. To.
As a result, the mode of the notification display (type of fluctuation pattern) related to the notification display of the special symbol based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time reduction control, and the special figure 2 executed while the time reduction control is stopped. The mode of the notification display (type of fluctuation pattern) related to the notification display of the special symbol based on the start information is related to each other (the same fluctuation time).
Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the first specific advantageous state, which is composed of different gaming states (during execution of time saving control and during stopping of time saving control), as a series of gaming states.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 46, right-handed notification (right-handed notification display on the launch position display of the state display device 63 and right-handed notification display in the launch position display of the state display device 63) is performed according to the start of the jackpot gaming state related to the “first hit”. The right-handed notification effect on the display screen 23a of the image display device 23) is started.
Then, the right-handed notification is continued until the end of the continuous chan period that is started in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the "first hit".
That is, during the continuous Chan period, the right-handed notification is not terminated in response to the end of the time reduction control, but is continued until the end of the advantageous period after the time reduction.
Specifically, the right-handed notification is started in FIG. 2 when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0". If the special figure 2 start information is not stored in the information storage area (the special figure 2 hold number is "0"), the process is terminated in response to the end of the time saving control.
On the other hand, in the right-handed notification, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the special figure 2 start information storage area When "1" or more special figure 2 start information is stored (the number of special figure 2 hold is "1" or more), at least a small amount generated based on the final special figure 2 start information. It is continued until the end of the winning game state (when all the special drawing 2 starting information held at the end of the time saving except for the final special drawing 2 starting information indicates "V winning impossible small hit"). At this time, if the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the right-handed notification is terminated according to the end of the small hit gaming state. On the other hand, if the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state, the right-handed notification is continued thereafter.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "V winning small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery executed during the advantageous period after the time reduction, the game ball is on the right side during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the vehicle is not fired toward the path 30b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the passage of the V region (V prize) by the game ball cannot be obtained during the occurrence of the small hit game state generated based on the second special symbol lottery.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area has priority over the special figure 1 start information stored in the special figure 1 start information storage area. The winning judgment (starting judgment) is executed. Further, when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 executed during the execution of the time reduction control reaches a predetermined second time reduction number, the time reduction control is terminated.
As a result, a state in which the special figure winning determination based on the special figure 2 start information is continuously executed from the execution of the time saving control to the end of the time saving control (hereinafter referred to as "first specific advantageous state"). Can be configured.
Specifically, from the start of the time reduction control to the end of the notification display of the special symbol based on all the special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area after the end of the time reduction control. During the period, the first specific advantageous state can be configured.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a notification effect (variation effect and stop effect) corresponding to a notification display for notifying the result of the special figure winning determination based on the special figure 2 start information executed during the execution of the time reduction control, and the time reduction end Special figure 2 start information stored in the special figure 2 start information storage area when the condition is satisfied (when the time reduction control is stopped according to the value of the second time reduction counter becoming "0"). Hereinafter, the notification effect (variable effect and stop effect) corresponding to the notification display for notifying the result of the special figure winning judgment based on (referred to as "pending second special game information") and the effect content (battle effect) related to each other. ).
As a result, the effect content related to the notification effect executed while the time reduction control is being executed and the effect content related to the notification effect (notification effect based on the reserved second special game information) executed while the time reduction control is stopped can be obtained. It will be related to each other.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the first specific advantageous state, which is composed of different gaming states (execution of time saving control and stopping of time saving control), as a series of gaming states.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the small hit effect executed during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state that occurs when it is determined that the "small hit" is won by the special figure winning determination executed during the execution of the time reduction control. And, the notification effect corresponding to the notification display for notifying the result of the special figure winning judgment based on the special drawing 2 start information executed during the execution of the time saving control, and the result of the special drawing winning judgment based on the reserved second special game information. The notification effect corresponding to the notification display for notifying the above and the effect content (battle effect) related to each other.
As a result, the effect content related to the small hit effect executed during the execution of the time reduction control, the effect content related to the notification effect executed during the execution of the time reduction control, and the notification effect executed while the time reduction control is stopped ( The contents of the effect related to the notification effect (notification effect based on the reserved second special game information) are related to each other.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player more strongly recognize the first specific advantageous state, which is composed of different gaming states (during the execution of the time saving control and while the time saving control is stopped), as a series of gaming states. It will be possible to further improve the interest.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving control is started according to the end of the jackpot gaming state.
This constitutes a state that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter referred to as "second specific advantageous state") during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the time saving control, and after the end of the time saving control. be able to.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, a notification for notifying the result of a jackpot winning effect (judgment effect) executed during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state and a special figure winning determination based on the second start information executed during the execution of the time saving control. Regarding the notification effect corresponding to the display and the notification effect corresponding to the notification display that notifies the result of the special figure winning judgment based on the reserved second special game information, the production contents related to each other (the theme (theme)). (Direction to be).
As a result, the effect content related to the jackpot effect executed during the occurrence of the jackpot specific gaming state, the effect content related to the notification effect executed during the execution of the time reduction control, and the notification effect executed while the time reduction control is stopped. The contents of the effect related to (notification effect based on the second special game information on hold) are related to each other.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the second specific advantageous state composed of different gaming states (during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the time saving control, and during the stopping of the time saving control) as a series of gaming states. , It becomes possible to further improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various changes can be made in the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the continuous chan period ends in response to the end of the small hit game state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information.
However, the continuous Chan period may be configured to end in response to the end of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery does not include "missing" (missing) ("missing" is not selected).
However, the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery may include "missing" (missing) ("missing" can be selected).
In such a configuration, the continuous change period ends when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0". Time hold special figure 2 If the start information does not exist, the process ends according to the end of the time reduction control.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the time reduction end hold special figure 2 start information exists. In (When all the time reduction end hold special figure 2 start information indicates "V winning impossible small hit"). At this time, the result of the special figure winning determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and the game ball is used during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information. If the passage of the V region is not detected, or if the result of the special figure winning determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "missing", the special symbol is notified based on the final special figure 2 start information. According to the end of the display, the continuous chan period ends. On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information. If the passage of the area is detected, or if the result of the special figure winning judgment based on the final special figure 2 start information is "big hit", the notification display of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information is displayed. Even after the end, the consecutive chan period will continue.
Further, in such a configuration, the right-handed notification is performed when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming “0”. Reservation at the end of the time reduction If the start information does not exist, the process ends according to the end of the time reduction control.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is stopped in response to the value of the time reduction counter (first time reduction counter or second time reduction counter) becoming "0", the time reduction end hold special figure 2 start information exists. The right-handed notification is continued at least until the end of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol generated based on the final special figure 2 start information (excluding the final special figure 2 start information). (When all the time reduction end hold special figure 2 start information indicates "V winning impossible small hit"). At this time, the result of the special figure winning determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and the game ball is used during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information. If the passage of the V region is not detected, or if the result of the special figure winning determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "missing", the special symbol is notified based on the final special figure 2 start information. The right-handed notification ends according to the end of the display. On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the final special figure 2 start information is "small hit", and V by the game ball during the occurrence of the small hit gaming state generated based on the final special figure 2 start information. If the passage of the area is detected, or if the result of the special figure winning judgment based on the final special figure 2 start information is "big hit", the notification display of the special symbol based on the final special figure 2 start information is displayed. Right-handed notification continues even after the end.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the "V winning small hit" is won based on the second special symbol lottery (starting judgment) executed during the continuous Chan period, the first pre-judgment and the second pre-judgment are performed. Will be executed. Then, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the battle icon during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. Further, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of the battle effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot game state is determined. Further, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the congratulatory icon during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
However, during the continuous Chan period, the timing for executing the first pre-determination and the second pre-determination and the timing for suggesting the result of each pre-determination can be appropriately changed.
For example, the first pre-determination and the second pre-determination may be executed at the end of the continuous battle effect (at the end of the small hit game state). With such a configuration, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the battle icon at the end of the continuous battle effect (during the occurrence of the small hit game state) based on the result of the first preliminary determination. Further, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of the battle effect to be executed after the end of the continuous battle effect (after the end of the small hit game state) is determined. Further, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the congratulatory icon at the end of the continuous battle effect (during the occurrence of the small hit game state). As a result, after the end of the continuous battle effect, it becomes possible to further execute a new continuous battle effect.
Alternatively, during each single-shot battle production (at the start of the variable display, at the start of the stop display, at the start of the small hit game state, at the end of the small hit game state, etc.), the first pre-judgment and the second pre-judgment are made. It may be configured to be executed. In such a configuration, based on the result of the first pre-judgment, whether to acquire (display) the battle icon during the one-shot battle production (during variable display, stop display, small hit game state, etc.). Decide whether or not. Further, based on the result of the first preliminary determination, the type of the battle effect to be executed after the end of the one-shot battle effect (after the end of the small hit game state) is determined. Further, based on the result of the second preliminary determination, it is determined whether or not to acquire (display) the congratulatory icon during the one-shot battle effect (during variable display, stop display, occurrence of small hit game state, etc.). This makes it possible to develop a single-shot battle effect into a continuous battle effect (change the type of battle effect).

1 Pachinko machine 11 Game board 23 Image display device 24 Drum type display device 30 Game area 30a Left side route 30b Right side route 41 Start gate 51 First start port 52 Second start port 52a Ordinary electric accessory 53 Large prize device 53a Special electric combination Object 54 Character prize winning device 54a Special electric character 200 Main control circuit 300 Staging control circuit

Claims (1)

A game information acquisition means for acquiring the first game information when the first condition is satisfied and acquiring the second game information when the second condition is satisfied.
A game information storage means capable of storing the second game information acquired by the game information acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and a game information storage means.
A winning determination means that executes a winning determination based on the first game information or the second game information acquired by the game information acquisition means.
When the winning determination based on the first game information is executed , the result of the winning determination is notified according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination executed based on the result of the winning determination. 1 The first notification display means for executing the notification display and
When the winning determination based on the second game information is executed, the result of the winning determination is notified according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination executed based on the result of the winning determination. The second notification display means for executing the second notification display and
When a specific result is determined by the winning determination, a special gaming state control means for causing a special gaming state and
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, an advantageous state in which the second condition is easily satisfied is generated, and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state control means for ending the advantageous state is provided.
The first notification display or the effect control means for executing the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display is provided.
The winning determination means executes the winning determination with respect to the second game information in preference to the first game information.
The predetermined end condition is satisfied when the number of times of the second notification display executed during the occurrence of the advantageous state reaches the predetermined number of times.
The mode of the notification effect is selected according to the notification mode determined by the notification mode determination.
The effect control means has the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination executed during the occurrence of the advantageous state, and the game information when the predetermined end condition is satisfied. As the notification effect corresponding to the second notification display for notifying the result of the winning determination based on the second game information stored in the storage means, the winning determination executed during the non-occurrence of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the notification effect in which the result of the winning determination is suggested by a specific mode different from the notification effect corresponding to the first notification display for notifying the result.

Images